NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICS ORDINARY LEVEL 6118/1

PAPER 1 Multiple Choice 45 minutes
Marks 40 2023

Additional Materials: Multiple choice answer sheet

Non-programmable calculator
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

E L
INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

V
• Write in soft pencil.
• Make sure that you receive the multiple choice answer sheet with your examination number on it.

L E
• There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question, there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider

Y
correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.
• If you want to change an answer, thoroughly erase the one you wish to delete.

R
• The Periodic Table is printed on page 14.

A
• Read the instructions on the answer sheet carefully.

N
• Each correct answer will score one mark.

I
• Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
• All questions in this paper carry equal marks.

D
• You may use a non-programmable calculator.

O R
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/1/23 [Turn over

331943
 2
1 A learner uses a damaged rule to measure the length of a metal rod. She places
one end of the rod at the 1 cm mark as shown.
metal rod

damaged
end 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
cm

How long is the metal rod?

A 4.3 cm
B 4.6 cm
C 5.3 cm
D 5.6 cm

2 Which row shows the correct symbol and unit for momentum?

symbol unit
A m kg∙m/s
B m Nm
C p Nm
D p kg∙m/s

3 The period of a given pendulum is 5 seconds. A learner measures the period of the
pendulum and gets the following measurements.

Measurement 1 Measurement 2 Measurement 3

7.50 s 7.47 s 7.51 s

Which of the following describes the learner’s measurements?

A accurate and precise
B accurate but imprecise
C inaccurate and imprecise
D inaccurate but precise

4 An electric wire has a diameter of about 0.23 mm.

Which instrument can be used to give the most accurate measurement of this wire?
A measuring tape
B meter stick
C micrometer
D rope and ruler

6118/1/23

331943
 3
5 Which quantity is a scalar?
A moment
B force
C power
D velocity

6 A boat cruises with a forward force of 400 N to the south. A wave west exerts a force
of 300 N to the west on the boat. The diagram shows the forces acting on the boat.
boat
300 N

400 N
What is the magnitude and direction of the resultant force?
A 500 N on a bearing of 217º
B 500 N on a bearing of 053°
C 700 N on a bearing of 053º
D 700 N on a bearing of 217º

7 The diagram shows the distance-time graph of four different objects A, B, C and D.

Which object is moving at a decreasing speed?

A B
C
distance

0
time

6118/1/23 [Turn over

331943
 4
8 A toy car travels from rest at a constant acceleration for 2 seconds until it reaches a
speed of 0.8 m/s. It then continues with this same speed for another 3 seconds as
shown in the graph.

0.8

0.6

speed/ms-1 0.4

0.2

0 1 2 3 4 5
time/s
What is the distance travelled by the car in 5 seconds?
A 1.6 m
B 3.2 m
C 4.0 m
D 6.2 m

9 A rocket of mass 12 kg is fired into the atmosphere.

Its velocity changes from 0 m/s to 50 m/s in 6 seconds.
What is the average resultant force acting on the rocket while it is accelerating?
A 25 N
B 50 N
C 75 N
D 100 N

10 An astronaut travels to the moon.

Which row describes how his mass and his weight on the moon compare to when
on Earth?

mass weight
A the same different
B different the same
C different different
D the same the same

6118/1/23

331943
 5
11 The diagram shows a steel spring with a load applied. The graph shows the
length of the spring against the load applied.
16

14

12
length/cm
10
steel spring
length 8

6
load
4

0
0 10 20 30 40 50
load/N
What is the extension of the spring when a load of 50 N is applied to it?
A 4.5 cm
B 5.0 cm
C 7.2 cm
D 12.4 cm

12 An object has a weight of 2620 N. What is the mass of this object?

A 26.2 kg
B 262 kg
C 2620 kg
D 26 200 kg

13 The diagram shows a balanced meter ruler.

0 20 50 70 100

4.0 N W
What is the weight, W placed at 70 cm?
A 1.7 N
B 2.7 N
C 4.0 N
D 6.0 N

6118/1/23 [Turn over

331943
 6
14 The diagram shows a 24 kg mass wooden block.

2.0 m
0.3 m

1.0 m
What is the density of the wooden block?
A 0.008 g/cm3
B 0.04 g/cm3
C 0.8 g/cm3
D 4.0 g/cm3

15 The diagram shows a water manometer connected to a gas tap.

The density of water is 1000 kg/m3.

atmospheric pressure

gas
supply water

0.6 m

0.2 m

How much higher is the gas supply pressure than the atmospheric pressure?
A 1 000 Pa
B 2 000 Pa
C 3 000 Pa
D 4 000 Pa

16 How many Pascals (Pa) is 100 mm Hg?

A 133.322 Pa
B 1333.22 Pa
C 13332.2 Pa
D 133322 Pa

6118/1/23

331943
 7
17 A ball is dropped from a table top.
table top
ball

Which sequence of energy transfers takes place from the time it leaves the table
to until it reaches the ground?
A gravitational potential → kinetic → sound
B chemical → kinetic → gravitational potential
C gravitational potential → sound → kinetic
D kinetic → gravitational potential → sound

18 Diffusion is a process resulting from a random motion of particles.

In which states of matter is diffusion observed?
A gases, liquids and solids.
B gases and liquids only.
C gases and solids only.
D liquids and solids only.

19 A thermocouple is used to measure temperature.

Which one is an advantage of using a thermocouple instead of a liquid-in-glass
thermometer?
A It is limited to a narrow range of temperature.
B It can measure temperature that changes rapidly.
C It’s scale is more visible than that of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
D It uses a more sensitive liquid than that in a liquid-in-glass thermometer.

20 What is the main process of heat transfer that occurs in fluids?

A conduction
B convection
C evaporation
D radiation

6118/1/23 [Turn over

331943
 8
21 Cast iron has a specific heat capacity of 460 J / (kg °C). An object made of cast
iron has a mass of 2.0 kg.
What is the amount of heat required to increase the temperature of this object from
25 °C to 100 °C?
A 17 250 J
B 23 000 J
C 69 000 J
D 92 000 J

22 Liquid water boils to become steam and steam condenses to become liquid water.
Which row explains what happens to the temperature of water while it is boiling, and
what happens to the temperature of steam while it is condensing?

temperature of water while temperature of steam while

boiling condensing
A increases decreases
B increases remains constant
C remains constant decreases
D remains constant remains constant

23 Which source of waves produces longitudinal waves?

A A lamp.
B A loudspeaker.
C A radio transmitter.
D A stone thrown in a water pool.

24 What is the frequency of a radio wave that has a wave speed of 3 × 108 m/s and a
wavelength of 3.26 m?
A 1.1 × 10-8 Hz
B 3.0 × 107 Hz
C 9.2 × 107 Hz
D 9.8 × 108 Hz

6118/1/23

331943
 9
25 The diagram shows a light ray entering a new medium.

40º

20º

What is the refractive index of the new medium?

A 0.34
B 0.53
C 1.88
D 2.01

26 The diagram shows an object placed in front of a converging lens.

image
F
object F

lens

What are the characteristics of the image?

A inverted and real
B inverted and virtual
C real and upright
D virtual and upright

27 Which is the unit of charges?

A amperes
B coulombs
C joules
D watts

6118/1/23 [Turn over

331943
 10
28 The diagram shows an uncharged ball covered with metallic paint. The ball is
suspended on an insulating thread. It is placed near a negatively charged rod.

insulating thread

negatively
ball covered with charged
metallic paint rod

Which diagram shows the charge distribution on the ball?

A B C D

29 Which expression gives the electromotive force?

A total energy
charge
energy output
B total energy input

potential difference
C
current

D workdone
charge
30 Resistance is influenced by both the length and thickness of the conductors.
Which of the following copper wires will have the highest resistance in an electric
circuit at constant temperature?
A
B
C
D

6118/1/23

331943
 11
31 The diagram shows part of a circuit consisting of three identical resistors.
4Ω
4Ω
4Ω

What is the total resistance in the circuit?

A 4Ω
B 6Ω
C 8Ω
D 12 Ω

32 Which electrical symbol represents a safety device that melts when the current in
the circuit becomes greater than needed?
A

33 There is a current of 5.0 A in a resistor. The potential difference (p.d.) across the
resistor is 12 V. The resistor is switched on.
How much energy is transferred in the resistor in 1.0 minute?
A 25 J
B 60 J
C 1 200 J
D 3 600 J

34 What proves that a given metal bar is a permanent magnet?

A It attracts both ends of a compass needle.
B It attracts one end of another magnet.
C It conducts electricity.
D It repels one end of another magnet.

35 A straight wire is perpendicular to the paper. It carries a current into the paper.
What is the magnetic field pattern and its direction around the wire?

A B C D

6118/1/23 [Turn over

331943
 12
36 A bar magnet is moved into a solenoid (stationary coil) and an e.m.f. is induced.
moving magnet
N

S centre-zero
galvanometer
stationary coil

Which change increases the induced e.m.f.?

A Move the magnet faster.
B Reduce the number of turns in the solenoid.
C Reverse the direction of the magnet.
D Use a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.

37 The nuclide notation for an isotope of uranium is 236

92
U.
Which row gives the number of protons and neutrons in the nucleus of this isotope?
protons neutrons
A 92 92
B 92 144
C 144 92
D 144 236

38 Which of the following is a property of beta particles?

A can only be stopped by lead or concrete
B deflect towards the negative plate
C deflect towards the positive plate
D have higher penetrating ability

39 A certain element has two isotopes.

Which row compares the nucleon numbers and the proton numbers of these isotopes?

nucleon numbers proton numbers

A must be different must be different
B must be different must be the same
C must be the same must be different
D must be the same must be the same

6118/1/23

331943
 13
40 The equation represents an isotope of radium (Ra) decaying to an isotope of actinium
(Ac) with the emission of particle X.
224 224
Ra →
88 89 Ac + X

What is particle X?
0
A -1
e
1
B 1 H
4
C 2 He
D 1
0
n

6118/1/23

331943
 14
DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

Group

I II III IV V VI VII 0

1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
23 24 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

331943
133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89 †
*58 - 71 Lanthanoid series 140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
†90 - 103 Actinoid series Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Key a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
b = proton (atomic) number Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).

6118/2/23
 15

BLANK PAGE

6118/1/23

331943
 16

BLANK PAGE

The DNEA acknowledges the usage and reproduction of third party copyright material in the NSSC Assessment, with and without permission
from the copyright holder. The Namibian Government Copyright Act allows copyright material to be used limitedly and fairly for educational
and non-commercial purposes.

The Directorate of National Assessment and Examinations operates under the auspices of the Ministry of Education, Arts and Culture in
Namibia.

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/1/23

331943
Centre Number Candidate Number Candidate Name

NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICS ORDINARY LEVEL 6118/2

PAPER 2 1 hour 30 minutes
Marks 80 2023

Additional Materials: Non-programmable calculator

Ruler

E L
INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

V
• Candidates answer on the Question Paper in the spaces provided.

E
• Write your Centre Number, Candidate Number and Name in the spaces

L
provided on top of this page.
• Write in dark blue or black pen. For Examiner’s Use

Y
• You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
• Do not use correction fluid. 1

R
• Do not write in the margin For Examiner’s Use. 2

A
3
• Answer all questions. 4

I N
5
• The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question

D
or part question. 6
7

R
• You will lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 8

O
appropriate units. 9
10
• Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e acceleration of free fall g = 10 m/s2).
Total

Marker
Checker

This document consists of 13 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE
© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/2/23 [Turn over
331944
 2
For
Examiner’s
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the distance-time graph for a journey made by a cyclist Use
between town A and town B. The cyclist leaves town A at time t = 0 and
arrives at town B at t = 4.0 hours.
60
distance / km 50
40

30

20

10

0
0 1 2 3 4 5
t / hours

Fig. 1.1
(a) Define distance.

..................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Determine the distance between the two towns.

distance = .............................. km [1]

(c) Determine the time for which the cyclist rests during the journey, before he
reaches town B.

time = ................................ hours [1]

(d) The speed of the cyclist near the end of the journey is greater than the
speed at the beginning. State how the graph shows this.

..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) Calculate the average speed of the cyclist for the journey from A to B.

average speed = ................. km/h [3]

[7]
6118/2/23
331944
 3
For
Examiner’s
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a box of mass of 50 kg, placed on a rough horizontal surface. Use
The box is pulled by a force of 120 N that acts at an angle of 60° to the horizontal.
The box moves at a constant velocity along the surface.

box 120 N

rough surface
60°
50 kg

Fig. 2.1
(a) State the resultant force on the box when the forces are applied so that
the box moves at constant velocity.

resultant force = ........................N [1]

(b) Draw a labelled force diagram of all the forces acting on the box.

[2]

6118/2/23 [Turn over

331944
 4
For
Examiner’s
(c) Fig. 2.2 shows two forces acting at a point. Use
In the space below Fig. 2.2, draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant
of the two forces.

NOT TO
SCALE

60 N

45º
100 N

Fig. 2.2

resultant force = .......................... [4]

[7]

6118/2/23
331944
 5
For
Examiner’s
3 Fig. 3.1 shows two ice hockey players moving towards each other. Use
Player A has a mass of 78 kg and a speed of 7.5 m/s.
Player B has a mass of 91 kg and a speed of 5.5 m/s.
The players collide and then move off together.

before the collision

player A player B

Fig. 3.1
(a) State the principle of conservation of momentum.

..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Immediately after the collision the two players move off together.
Use the conservation of momentum to calculate the speed of the two players
immediately after collision.
Show your working.

speed = ................................. m/s [4]

(c) The players came to rest in 2 seconds.
Calculate the force on the players while they are stopping.

force = .......................................N [2]

[7]

6118/2/23 [Turn over

331944
 6
For
Examiner’s
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a fork-lift truck lifting a heavy crate. Use
The crate weighs 11 500 N and is lifted vertically 2.60 m.
crate

11 500 N
2.60 m

Fig. 4.1
(a) Moment and work are both calculated from an applied force and a distance.
Describe the difference between the distances used to calculate moment
and work.

moment .....................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

work ..........................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Calculate the work done to lift the crate.

work done = .............................. J [2]

(c) The weight of the crate causes a clockwise moment of 13 800 Nm about the
centre of the crate and the front wheel of the fork-lift truck.
Calculate the distance d.

d = ............................................ m [2]

[6]
6118/2/23
331944
 7
For
Examiner’s
5 (a) Explain the difference in how thermal energy is conducted along a solid Use
non-metallic rod and along a metallic rod.

non-metallic rod ........................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

metallic rod................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A thermos flask is used to keep hot or cold beverages at the same temperature
for a long time.
Suggest three features of the thermos flask that are useful in preventing
the heat from leaving or entering the thermos flask.
In each case,
• state which method of heat transfer is being prevented and
• explain how the feature prevents this method.

1 ................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

3 ................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [6]
(c) Explain why the boiling point of pure water at lower altitude is higher than
boiling point at higher altitude.

..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [3]

6118/2/23 [Turn over

331944
 8
For
Examiner’s
(d) (i) Give a molecular interpretation of latent heat. Use

...........................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................

........................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the energy needed to turn 2 000 g of water, at 100°C into
steam. Specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 106 J/kg.

energy = .................................... J [3]

(iii) Water has a high specific heat capacity.
Explain why this is useful when it is used as a coolant in car engines.

...........................................................................................................

........................................................................................................... [2]

[19]

6118/2/23
331944
 9
For
Examiner’s
6 A light ray is incident on a glass prism. Use
The angle of incidence is 38º, as shown in Fig. 6.1. The refractive index of
glass is 1.5.

air
NOT TO
SCALE
38º

ray of light
glass

Fig. 6.1
(a) Define refraction of light.

..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Calculate the angle of refraction inside the glass prism.

angle of refraction = ................... ° [3]

(c) Complete the path of the light ray inside the prism and label the angle of
refraction. [2]

[7]

6118/2/23 [Turn over

331944
 10
For
Examiner’s
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit diagram. Use

A1 A3

20 Ω A2 20 Ω

Fig. 7.1
(a) Calculate the total resistance in the circuit.

total resistance = ........................ [2]

(b) Ammeter A1 reads 0.2 A. State the reading of ammeter A2 and
ammeter A3.

A2 .................................................

A3 ................................................. [1]

(c) A third resistor of 25 Ω is connected into the circuit. On Fig. 7.1 draw the
third resistor in a position such that the total circuit resistance is a minimum. [1]
(d) Calculate the total resistance of the circuit after the 25 Ω resistor is
connected. Show your working.

total resistance = ......................Ω [3]

[7]
6118/2/23
331944
 11
For
Examiner’s
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a simplified diagram of an electric motor. Use

•
magnet

N S

coil

•
Fig. 8.1
(a) Identify the type of motor represented in Fig. 8.1.

.................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State two ways in which the speed of rotation of the coil can be increased
in the motor in Fig. 8.1.

1 ................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The motor in Fig. 8.1 can be used as a generator. When the coil is
rotated with a constant speed an e.m.f is induced in the coil.
By referring to the principle of electromagnetic induction, briefly explain
how an e.m.f is generated in the coil when the coil is rotated.

..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [2]

[5]

6118/2/23 [Turn over

331944
 12
For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a lamp marked 12 W connected to a step-down transformer Use
12 W

240 V 1000 100

a.c. turns turns

Fig. 9.1
(a) State a reason why transformers function only with alternating current.

..................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the voltage output. Show your working.

voltage output = .......................... [3]

(c) Assuming that no energy is lost in the transformer.
Calculate the current passing through the lamp.

current = .................................. A [3]

[7]

6118/2/23
331944
 13
For
Examiner’s
10 Plutonium-239 is one of the radioactive wastes from nuclear power stations. Use
Plutonium-239 decays by emitting alpha radiation.
(a) Complete the equation which represents the decay of the plutonium nucleus.
239 235
94 Pu → ......... U + ......... [2]
(b) Describe the changes which take place in the nucleus as an alpha particle
is produced.
..................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 10.1 shows how the activity of a sample of plutonium-239 varies
with time.
10 000

9000

8000

7000
activity in becquerels

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

0
0 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000
time in years

Fig. 10.1
(i) Define half-life.
...........................................................................................................

........................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the half-life for the activity of the sample of plutonium-239.

Answer ........................................ [2]

[8]

6118/2/23
331944
 14

BLANK PAGE

6118/2/23

331944
 15

BLANK PAGE

6118/2/23

331944
 16

BLANK PAGE

The DNEA acknowledges the usage and reproduction of third party copyright material in the NSSC Assessment, with and without
permission from the copyright holder. The Namibian Government Copyright Act allows copyright material to be used limitedly and fairly
for educational and non-commercial purposes.

The Directorate of National Assessment and Examinations operates under the auspices of the Ministry of Education, Arts and Culture in
Namibia.

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/2/23

331944
 NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICS ORDINARY LEVEL 6118/1

PAPER 1 Multiple Choice 45 minutes
Marks 40 2022

Additional Materials: Multiple choice answer sheet

Non-programmable calculator
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

E L
INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

V
• Write in soft pencil.
• Make sure that you receive the multiple choice answer sheet with your examination number on it.

L E
• There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question, there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider

Y
correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.
• If you want to change an answer, thoroughly erase the one you wish to delete.

R
• The Periodic Table is printed on page 14.

A
• Read the instructions on the answer sheet carefully.

N
• Each correct answer will score one mark.

I
• Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
• All questions in this paper carry equal marks.

D
• You may use a non-programmable calculator.

O R
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/1/22 [Turn over

321007
 2
1 The diagram shows a measuring cylinder filled with water up to a certain level, and
the same measuring cylinder with a stone completely immersed in the water.
200 200
cm3 cm3

150 150

100 100
stone

50 50

before after
What is the volume of the stone?
A 51 cm3
B 60 cm3
C 70 cm3
D 90 cm3

2 Which quantity is a scalar?

A acceleration
B displacement
C momentum
D temperature

3 The speed time graph shows part of the journey.

30

speed 15
m/s

0 10 20
time/s

What is the total distance covered for this part of the journey?
A 150 m
B 300 m
C 600 m
D 900 m

6118/1/22

321007
 3
4 The speed time graph represents the motion of a motorist for 900 seconds.

20
speed
m/s

10

0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
time/s
Which row describes the motion?

Time
0 - 100 100 - 500 500 - 900
A at rest constant speed at rest
B constant acceleration at rest constant deceleration
C constant acceleration constant speed constant deceleration
D constant speed at rest constant speed

5 The mass of an empty measuring cylinder is 8.5 g.

When 20 cm3 of a liquid is added to the measuring cylinder, the mass increases to
26.5 g.
What is the density of the liquid?
A 0.25 g/cm3
B 0.90 g/cm3
C 1.2 g/cm3
D 1.4 g/cm3

6 The diagram shows a block of steel of dimensions 6.0 cm × 5.0 cm × 3.0 cm.
The density of steel is 7.85 g/cm3.
5.0 cm

3.0 cm 6.0 cm

What is the mass of the block?

A 0.087 g
B 11.46 g
C 109.90 g
D 706.50 g
6118/1/22 [Turn over
321007
 4
7 The diagram shows a heater in a box that contains air.
A thermometer is fixed in the box. The thermometer bulb is in the position as shown.
thermometer
box bulb
air

thermometer

heater

Which row shows the main process by which thermal energy is transferred through
the air and from air particles to the thermometer bulb?

through the air from air particles to the thermometer bulb

A conduction convection
B convection radiation
C convection conduction
D conduction radiation

8 The diagram shows an eagle landing. The eagle is landing in a vertical direction
downward.
In which direction does air resistance act on the eagle?

D B

9 An electric wire has a diameter of about 0.23 mm.

Which instrument can be used to give the most accurate measurement of this wire?
A measuring tape
B meter stick
C micrometer
D rope and ruler

6118/1/22

321007
 5
10 The gravitational field strength on the moon is 1.6 N/kg. An astronaut has a weight
of 120 N on the moon.
What is the mass of the astronaut?
A 12 kg
B 75 kg
C 120 kg
D 192 kg

11 A ball of 0.4 kg mass moving at a speed of 10.0 m/s collides head on with another
ball of 0.2 kg mass moving at a speed of 5.0 m/s in the opposite direction.
The two balls stick together after collision.
What is the velocity of the two balls after collision if momentum has been conserved?
A 5.0 m/s
B 6.7 m/s
C 8.3 m/s
D 15 m/s

12 The specific heat capacity of water is 4 200 J/(kgºC).

What is the amount of heat required to change the temperature of 5 kg of water from
5 ºC to 20 ºC?
A 105 kJ
B 315 kJ
C 420 kJ
D 525 kJ

13 A 600 g object is on top of the tower and has 9 600 J of energy due to its position
above the ground.
How high is the tower?
A 16 m
B 160 m
C 1600 m
D 16000 m

14 Which type of energy is a result of regrouping of atoms?

A chemical
B geothermal
C nuclear
D solar

6118/1/22 [Turn over

321007
 6
15 Which quantity is defined as the amount of heat energy absorbed or emitted when
a kilogram of a substance changes state?
A the heat capacity of a substance
B the latent heat of a substance
C the specific heat capacity of a substance
D the specific latent heat of a substance

16 A fruit falls from a tree, then hits the ground and stops.
Which energy changes occur?
A gravitational potential energy → kinetic energy → sound energy
B gravitational potential energy → sound energy → kinetic energy
C kinetic energy → gravitational potential energy → sound energy
D kinetic energy → sound energy → gravitational potential energy

17 Temperature always remain constant during phase changes.

What is the reason for constant temperature during boiling?
A The heat energy is released to the surrounding by the system.
B The heat energy is used to overcome the inter-particle forces.
C The kinetic energy is increased without increasing the potential energy.
D There is no heat energy supplied during boiling.

18 Which term is the distance between two successive in phase points on a wave?
A amplitude
B frequency
C wavefront
D wavelength

6118/1/22

321007
 7
19 The diagram shows a ray of red light travelling from air into a glass prism with a
refractive index of 1.5 at point S.

normal

i S

ray of
red light

The red light ray enters the glass prism at an angle of incidence, i, of 30.0º.
Which row gives the angle of refraction, r, and the change in direction of the ray
inside the prism?

angle of refraction, r change in direction

A 19.5º away from the normal
B 19.5º toward the normal
C 30.0º away from the normal
D 30.0º toward the normal

20 Which row shows what happens to the properties of a wave as the wave enters a
different medium?

no change change
A frequency period
B frequency wavelength
C speed wavelength
D speed frequency

21 The diagram shows the electromagnetic spectrum.

L X-ray ultraviolet visible light M microwaves N

Which types of wave are L, M and N?

L M N
A gamma rays radio waves infrared
B gamma rays infrared radio waves
C infrared gamma rays radio waves
D infrared radio waves gamma rays

6118/1/22 [Turn over

321007
 8
22 The amplitude of a sound wave is increased and the frequency is decreased.
What happens to the pitch and loudness of the sound heard?
A The sound has a higher pitch and is louder.
B The sound has a higher pitch and is softer.
C The sound has a lower pitch and is louder.
D The sound has a lower pitch and is softer.

23 What is the correct symbol for the units of loudness of sound?

A Db
B dB
C HZ
D Hz

24 A Physics student has trouble seeing distant objects clearly.

Which row gives the student’s eye defect and the type of lenses that the
student needs?

eye defect needed lens

A far-sighted concave
B far-sighted convex
C short-sighted concave
D short-sighted convex

25 Which term is referred to as workdone per unit charge?

A current
B energy
C power
D voltage

26 The diagram shows part of an electric circuit.

2Ω 3Ω

4Ω

5Ω

What is the total resistance in the circuit?

A 2.2Ω
B 7.2Ω
C 12.3Ω
D 14.0Ω
6118/1/22

321007
 9
27 Which electrical symbol represents a diode?

A B

C D

28 In an electric circuit, 40 C of electric charges passes through a bulb that runs on a

12 V supply in 5.0 s.
What is the electric power of the bulb?
A 1.50 W
B 16.7 W
C 57.0 W
D 96.0 W

29 The diagram shows an electric circuit with three resistors connected in parallel and
four ammeters A, B, C and D.
Which ammeter shows the largest reading?

A A D
10Ω
A

B A
20Ω

30Ω
A
C

6118/1/22 [Turn over

321007
 10
30 The diagram shows an arrangement in an electric circuit.

heater

Which row is correct about component X?

component X function
A fuse break the circuit when the current is too high
B fuse control the voltage in the circuit
C rheostat break the circuit when the current is too high
D rheostat control the voltage in the circuit

31 A student wishes to demonstrate electromagnetic induction. She has the connectivity

wires and a voltmeter.
Which other apparatus does she need?

power supply magnet

A   Key
B  ×  = needed
C ×  × = not needed
D × ×

32 The diagram shows a transformer. The primary coil has an input of 240 V.
The secondary coil has an output of 12 V.

240 V P S 12 V

Assuming it is an ideal transformer and has an output current of 40 A.

What is the input current?
A 2A
B 20 A
C 72 A
D 800 A
6118/1/22

321007
 11
33 The diagram shows a bar magnet and bar X.
When the magnet is moved closer to bar X, it attracted bar X.

N magnet S X

Which element is bar X made from?

A copper
B cobalt
C magnesium
D manganese

34 The diagram shows the magnetic field of a bar magnet with poles labelled M and O.

M O

Which statement correctly identifies the poles of the magnet?

A M is the North pole because the field lines run from South to North.
B M is the South pole because the field lines run from North to South.
C O is the North pole because the field lines run from South to North.
D O is the South pole because the field lines run from North to South.

6118/1/22 [Turn over

321007
 12
35 The diagrams shows two magnets PQ and RS.

P R

Q S

When they are placed end-to-end, P attracts S and Q repels S. R is South pole.

Which row gives the correct poles of P, Q and S?

P Q S
A North South North
B South North South
C South North North
D North South North

36 The nuclide notation of an isotope of carbon is 146C .

Which row gives the composition of a neutral atom of this isotope of carbon?

number of protons number of neutrons number of electrons

A 6 8 6
B 14 8 8
C 6 8 14
D 6 14 6

37 Which statement correctly defines isotopes?

A Atoms of the same element with different numbers of electrons.
B Atoms of the same element with different numbers of neutrons.
C Atoms of the same element with different numbers of protons.
D Atoms of the same element with the same numbers of nucleons.

38 Which statement describes the nature of an alpha particle?

A a helium atom
B a helium nucleus
C an electron from the nucleus
D an electron from the shell

6118/1/22

321007
 13
39 A uranium isotope decays according to the following equation.
234 A
92
U → zX + β
Which row gives the correct symbol for X and the correct value for A and z?

A X z
A 232 Np 90
B 232 Th 90
C 234 Np 93
D 234 Th 93

40 A radioactive isotope sample contains 3 600 atoms.

The isotope has a half-life of 3 hours.
Which statement is correct?
A Only 450 atoms will have decayed after 3 half-lives.
B Only 450 atoms will survive after 3 half-lives.
C Only 450 atoms will have decayed after 3 hours.
D Only 450 atoms will survive after 3 hours.

6118/1/22

321007
 DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

Group

I II III IV V VI VII 0

1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
23 24 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
14

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54

321007
6118/1/22
133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89 †
*58 - 71 Lanthanoid series 140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
†90 - 103 Actinoid series Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Key a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
b = proton (atomic) number Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
 15

BLANK PAGE

6118/1/22

321007
 16

BLANK PAGE

The DNEA acknowledges the usage and reproduction of third party copyright material in the NSSC Assessment, with and without permission
from the copyright holder. The Namibian Government Copyright Act allows copyright material to be used limitedly and fairly for educational
and non-commercial purposes.

The Directorate of National Assessment and Examinations operates under the auspices of the Ministry of Education, Arts and Culture in
Namibia.

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/1/22

321007
Centre Number Candidate Number Candidate Name

NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICS ORDINARY LEVEL 6118/2

PAPER 2 1 hour 30 minutes
Marks 80 2022

Additional Materials: Non-programmable calculator

Ruler

E L
INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

V
• Candidates answer on the Question Paper in the spaces provided.
For Examiner’s Use

E
• Write your Centre Number, Candidate Number and Name in the spaces

L
provided on top of this page. 1
• Write in dark blue or black pen. 2

Y
• You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
3
• Do not use correction fluid.

R
4
• Do not write in the margin For Examiner’s Use.

A
5
• Answer all questions. 6

I N
7
• The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question 8

D
or part question.
9

R
10
• You will lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use

O
appropriate units. 11
12
• Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e acceleration of free fall g = 10 m/s2).
Total

Marker
Checker

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/2/22 [Turn over

321008
 2
For
Examiner’s
1 Give one word/term for each of the following scientific descriptions. Use
Write only the word/term next to the description.
(a) The energy of position. . ........................................................................... [1]

(b) The basic principle on which electric generators function.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The number of complete waves that pass a point in one second.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The rate of doing work. ............................................................................ [1]

(e) The rate of change of velocity. ................................................................. [1]

(f) Turning effect of force. ............................................................................. [1]

[6]

6118/2/22
321008
 3
For
Examiner’s
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a fork-lift truck lifting a box. Use

box

Fig. 2.1
The electric motor that drives the lifting mechanism is powered by batteries.
(a) State the form of the energy stored in the batteries.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A box of mass 32 kg is lifted through a vertical distance of 2.5 m.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the box.

gravitational potential energy = ..........................J [2]

(ii) The efficiency of the lifting mechanism is 65%.
Calculate the total energy input.

total energy input = .....................J [2]

(c) The batteries are recharged from a mains voltage supply that is generated
in an oil-fired power station.
By comparison with a wind farm, state one advantage and one
disadvantage of running a power station using oil.
Advantage

................................................................................................................... [1]
Disadvantage

................................................................................................................... [1]

[7]

6118/2/22 [Turn over

321008
 4
For
Examiner’s
3 (a) A bus travels at a constant speed. It stops for a short time and then Use
travels at a higher constant speed.
Using the axes in Fig. 3.1, draw a distance-time graph of the journey.

distance

0
0 time
[3]

Fig 3.1
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the speed-time graph for an elevator as it starts moving
from rest at the ground floor to the top floor of the building.
4.0
speed
m/s
3.0

2.0

1.0

0
0 5 10 15 20 25

time/s

Fig 3.2

6118/2/22
321008
 5
For
Examiner’s
Use the graph in Fig. 3.2 to determine the distance from the ground floor Use
to the top floor of the building.

Distance = ................................ m [3]

(c)  (i) Using Fig 3.2, describe the motion of the elevator from 7.5 s to 20 s.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Calculate the deceleration of the elevator from 20 s until it stopped at
the top floor.

deceleration =........................ m/s2 [2]

[9]

6118/2/22 [Turn over

321008
 6
For
Examiner’s
4 (a) Define a vector quantity. Use

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An airplane is flying towards the east in still air at 92 m/s. The wind
starts to blow at 24 m/s from the north.
Draw a vector diagram to find the resultant velocity of the airplane.
Use a scale of 1.0 cm = 10 m/s.

W E

resultant velocity = . ...............m/s

S
direction ...................................... [5]

[6]

6118/2/22
321008
 7
For
Examiner’s
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a vehicle safety test. A car of mass 1000 kg moving at 20 m/s Use
makes a head-on collision with a lorry of mass 2000 kg moving at a speed of
16 m/s.
lorry, mass 2000 kg
car, mass 1000 kg

20 m/s 16 m/s

Fig. 5.1
(a) Define the principle of conservation of momentum.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the total momentum of the two vehicles before collision.

momentum = ....................kg.m/s [2]

(c) The two vehicles bounce back after collision. The car is now travelling at
a speed of 15 m/s.
Using the principle of conservation of momentum, calculate the speed of
the lorry after collision.

speed = . ................................m/s [2]

[6]

6118/2/22 [Turn over

321008
 8
For
Examiner’s
6 Fig. 6.1 shows part of the path of a ray of light through a glass block. Use

The critical angle for the glass/air boundary is 42°.

air
B

ray of
light glass
block

Fig. 6.1
(a) State the name that describes what is happening to the ray

at A,...........................................................................................................

at B............................................................................................................ [2]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw the path of the ray after C. [2]

[4]

6118/2/22
321008
 9
For
Examiner’s
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows an object O placed in front of a converging lens. Use

Fig. 7.1
(i) State a full description of image I .

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Using the ruler measure the focal length of the lens.

focal length = ..........................cm [1]

(b) Fig 7.2, shows an object O placed to the left of a converging lens.
A principal focus of the lens is at the position marked F.

Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw two rays to locate the image of object O.
Draw the image. [3]
(ii) Give two properties of the image formed.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

[8]

6118/2/22 [Turn over

321008
 10
For
Examiner’s
8 A boat is using echo-sounding equipment to measure the depth of the water Use
underneath it, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.

Fig. 8.1
The equipment in the boat sends a short pulse of sound downwards and
detects the echo after a time.
(a) Define the term pulse.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The wave is displayed on the cathode ray oscilloscope, and the
wavelength is 2 m.
Calculate the speed of sound, if the period of the wave is 0.0013 s.

speed.......................................m/s [3]

[4]

6118/2/22
321008
 11
For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows how one type of electric storage heater is constructed. Use
The heater has ceramic bricks inside. The electric elements heat the ceramic
bricks during the night. Later, during the daytime, the ceramic bricks transfer
the stored energy to the room.
air vents
warm air
controls rising
super efficient insulation

electric heating element

metal case
ceramic bricks

Fig. 9.1
(a)  (i) Complete the following sentences using the words from the box.

conduction convection evaporation

Energy is transferred through the metal casing by............................. [1]

The warm air rising from the heater transfers energy to the room by

. .................................................... [1]
(ii) Give a reason why the inside of the metal case is insulated.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(b) In winter, the electricity supply to a 2.6 kW storage heater is switched on
for seven hours each day.
(i) Calculate the energy transferred, in kilowatt-hours, from the
electricity supply to the heater in 7 hours.

energy.................................... kWh [2]

6118/2/22 [Turn over

321008
 12
For
Examiner’s
(ii) Calculate the cost of electricity if the heater is switched on for 7 hours Use
at the rate of N$5.00 per kilowatt-hour.

cost = N$...................................... [1]

(c) After the electricity supply is switched off, the temperature of the ceramic
bricks falls by 25°C.
(i) Define the term specific heat capacity.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the energy transferred from the ceramic bricks after the
electric supply is switched off. Include the unit.
Total mass of ceramic bricks = 120 kg.
Specific heat capacity of the ceramic bricks = 750 J/kg °C.

energy = ..................Unit.............. [3]

[11]

6118/2/22
321008
 13
For
Examiner’s
10 Fig. 10.1 shows two electrical circuits each containing one lamp of resistance Use
3 Ω and one lamp of resistance 5 Ω.
3Ω 5Ω 3Ω
switch 2
A A2

5Ω
switch 1
A1

9V 9V
switch

circuit 1 circuit 2

Fig. 10.1
(a)  (i) Name the arrangement of the lamps shown in circuit 2.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State two advantages of connecting the lamps as shown in circuit 2.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Calculate the ammeter reading shown in circuit 1, when the switch is
closed.

. .................................................. A [3]
(c) Calculate the combined resistance of the lamps in circuit 2, when both
switches are closed.

combined resistance = ............. Ω [2]

[8]

6118/2/22 [Turn over

321008
 14
For
Examiner’s
11 The diagram on Fig. 11.1 shows an a.c. generator. Use

The coil rotates about the axis as shown and cuts through the magnetic
field produced by the magnets.

magnets

axis
coil

Fig. 11.1
Fig. 11.2 shows the graph of the output from the a.c. generator

potential
difference

Fig. 11.2
(a) The vertical axis on Fig. 11.2 is labelled potential difference.
What is the label of the horizontal axis?

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The coil is rotated faster.
On Fig. 11.2, draw the output from the a.c. generator if everything else
remains the same. [2]
(c) The number of turns of wire on the coil is increased. This increases the
maximum induced potential difference.
State two other ways in which the maximum induced potential difference
could be increased.

1.................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

2.................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]

[5]

6118/2/22
321008
 15
For
Examiner’s
12 The count rate from a sample of radioactive material is measured for every 20 Use
minutes for 2 hours.
The results, suitably corrected for background radiation, are shown in
Table 12.1.
Table 12.1

time/min 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

count rate
280 210 164 122 88 72 54
counts/s
(a) Describe one major cause of the background radiation.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The radioactive material emits a beta particle.
Describe the nature of a beta particle.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) From the Table 12.1, without attempting a graph, estimate the half-life
of the radioactive material.

half-life = .................................min [1]

(d) State two precautions that should be taken for safe handling of the
radioactive material.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]

[6]

6118/2/22
321008
 16

BLANK PAGE

The DNEA acknowledges the usage and reproduction of third party copyright material in the NSSC Assessment, with and without
permission from the copyright holder. The Namibian Government Copyright Act allows copyright material to be used limitedly and fairly
for educational and non-commercial purposes.

The Directorate of National Assessment and Examinations operates under the auspices of the Ministry of Education, Arts and Culture in
Namibia.

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/2/22

321008
 NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICS ORDINARY LEVEL 6118/1

PAPER 1 Multiple Choice 1 hour
Marks 40 2021

Additional Materials: Multiple choice answer sheet

Non-programmable calculator
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

E L
INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

V
• Write in soft pencil.
• Make sure that you receive the multiple choice answer sheet with your examination number on it.

L E
• There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question, there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider

Y
correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.
• If you want to change an answer, thoroughly erase the one you wish to delete.

R
• The Periodic Table is printed on page 15.

A
• Read the instructions on the answer sheet carefully.

N
• Each correct answer will score one mark.

I
• Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
• All questions in this paper carry equal marks.

D
• You may use a non-programmable calculator.

O R
This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/1/21 [Turn over

 2
1 What is the base unit of density?
A g/cm3
B g/m3
C kg/cm3
D kg/m3

2 The diagram shows two identical spheres placed beside a scale.

spheres

0 mm 10 20 30 40

What is the diameter of one sphere?

A 4.5 mm
B 6.5 mm
C 9.0 mm
D 13.0 mm

3 A student wishes to measure directly the circumference of a football.

Which is the most suitable instrument to use?

A measuring tape
B micrometer screw gauge
C ruler
D vernier

4 Which quantity has the same unit as the potential difference (p.d.)?
A electric charge
B electric current
C electromotive force
D resistance

6118/1/21
 3
5 A forklift lifts a 4000 N load through a vertical height of 2.0 m in 0.50 s.

What useful power does the forklift develop in doing this?

A 1000 W
B 4000 W
C 8000 W
D 16000 W

6 Which factor affects the period of the pendulum?

A amplitude of swing
B angle of swing
C length of the string
D mass of the bob

7 Which of the following is the reason why velocity is a vector quantity?

A It has a direction and no magnitude.
B It has a magnitude and direction.
C It has a magnitude and no direction.
D It has no magnitude and direction.

8 The diagram shows two forces acting at a right angle on an object.

50 N

50 N

Which statement gives the resultant force on the object?

A 71 N on a bearing of 45°
B 71 N on a bearing of 90°
C 100 N on a bearing of 45°
D 100 N on a bearing of 90°

6118/1/21 [Turn over

 4
9 In a laboratory, a ball is dropped from a table. Ignore air resistance.

Which row describes the velocity and the acceleration of the ball at point X?

acceleration velocity
A constant constant
B constant increasing
C increasing constant
D increasing increasing

10 The graph represents the motion of a motorist travelling between two towns.

20
speed
m/s

10

0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
time/s

How far did the motorist travel at constant speed?

A 8000 m
B 10000 m
C 13000 m
D 18000 m

6118/1/21
 5
11 The diagram shows the speed-time graph of a moving object.

speed
Q

0
0 time

Which row perfectly describe the motion of the object?

section P section Q
A constant acceleration at rest
B constant acceleration constant speed
C constant speed at rest
D constant speed constant acceleration

12 The diagram shows an unbalanced rod. The two loads X and Y have the same
mass. X and Y can be moved along the rod.
X Y
rod
movement movement
of rod of rod
pivot

The rod turns in a clockwise direction.

Which action may bring about equilibrium?
A adding weight to X
B adding weight to Y
C moving X to the right
D moving Y to the right

13 An object of 5 kg mass travelling at the velocity of 100 m/s collides into a stationary
object with a mass of 15 kg. The two objects stick together after collision.
What is the velocity of the two objects after collision?
A 0 m/s
B 25 m/s
C 50 m/s
D 100 m/s

6118/1/21 [Turn over

 6
14 The diagram shows a block of a mass of 2 kg.

20 cm
10 cm
20 cm

What is the density of the block?

A 0.50 g/cm3
B 5.00 g/cm3
C 50.0 g/cm3
D 500 g/cm3

15 The diagram represents an incomplete energy flow diagram of a burning candle.

Heat + light

Which energy form is being transferred into heat and light energy?
A chemical potential
B elastic potential
C gravitational potential
D nuclear potential

16 Which of the following objects exerts the least pressure on the ground?
The objects are made from material with the same density and are all of the same
thickness.

D
A B C

17 Which statement is correct for a skydiver falling at terminal velocity?

A air resistance is greater than weight
B there is no net force on the skydiver
C there is a net force on the skydiver
D weight is greater than air resistance

6118/1/21
 7
18 Which statement about the boiling of a pure substance is correct?
A It is a change of state from solid to gas.
B It takes place at any temperature.
C It takes place at one specific temperature.
D It takes place at the surface of the liquid.

19 Which quantity does not change when there is an increase in temperature?

A the density of a steel block
B the diameter of the hole in a metal nut
C the length of an iron rod
D the mass of a metal coin

20 Which methods of heat transfer do not require a medium?

A both conduction and radiation
B conduction only
C convection only
D radiation only

6118/1/21 [Turn over

 8
21 The diagrams shows four thermometers.

25 °C 40 °C 250 °C 300 °C

20 °C 200 °C 260 °C

15 °C 150 °C 220 °C
35 °C
10 °C 100 °C 180 °C

5 °C 50 °C 140 °C

0 °C 30 °C 0 °C 100 °C

P Q R S

Which thermometer has the greatest range and which thermometer has the greatest
sensitivity?

greatest range greatest sensitivity

A R P
B R Q
C S P
D S Q

22 Which statement defines the specific heat capacity of a substance?

A Amount of heat energy absorbed or released when a 1 kg mass of a substance
changes a state.
B Amount of heat energy absorbed or released when any mass of a substance
changes a state.
C Amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of a 1 kg mass of a
substance by 1 Kelvin.
D Amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of any mass of a substance
by 1 Kelvin.

6118/1/21
 9
23 A metal has a specific heat capacity of 360 J/(kg °C). An object made from this
metal has a mass of 2.0 kg.

What is the heat capacity of the object?

A 180 J / °C
B 180 J / kg
C 720 J / °C
D 720 J / kg

24 The diagram shows electricity cables being installed. The cables are left sagging
between the poles, as shown in the diagram.

Why are the cables left sagging?

A To maximize tension when the cables expand on warm days.
B To minimize tension when the cables contract in cold days.
C To prevent more sagging of the cables during summer.
D To reduce heat loss during power transmission.

25 The diagram shows two divergent rays of light from an object O being reflected from
a plane mirror.

mirror

What are the properties of the image formed?

A real and laterally inverted
B real and vertically inverted
C virtual and laterally inverted
D virtual and vertically inverted

6118/1/21 [Turn over

 10
26 A light ray strikes the surface of a liquid at an angle of 25° as shown.
The refractive index of the liquid is 1.5.
Normal NOT TO SCALE
Air

25°

r
Liquid

What is the angle of refraction r?

A 16°
B 25°
C 37°
D 40°

27 Radio waves, microwave, infrared and X-rays are some of the components of the
electromagnetic spectrum.

Which statement is a feature of electromagnetic waves?

A They are affected by electric fields.
B They are affected by magnetic fields.
C They need a medium in which to travel.
D They are all transverse waves.

6118/1/21
 11
28 The points labelled F are the principal foci of a lens. A beam of parallel light is
incident on the lens.

Which diagram shows the path of the light after it passes through the lens?

A
F F

B
F F

C
F F

D
F F

29 A ray of light changes direction when it moves from one medium to another medium
with a different optical density.

Which row describes how the speed and the direction of the ray of light change when
it enters the new medium with less density?

speed direction
A decreases away from the normal
B decreases towards the normal
C increases away from the normal
D increases towards the normal

30 Vibrating objects produce sound waves of different frequencies in air.

Which of the following sound frequencies can be heard by a human with normal hearing?
A 15 Hz
B 1000 Hz
C 25 000 Hz
D 100 000 Hz

6118/1/21 [Turn over

 12
31 Which row in the table shows the correct symbol and unit for electric charge?

symbol unit
A C C
B C Q
C Q C
D Q Q

32 Which row correctly describes how the ammeter and voltmeter are connected in
an electric circuit?

ammeter voltmeter
A in parallel in parallel
B in parallel in series
C in series in parallel
D in series in series

33 Which copper wire will resist the flow of current the most at constant temperature?
A long thick wire
B long thin wire
C short thick wire
D short thin wire

34 The diagram shows part of a circuit containing two resistors.

6Ω

12Ω

What is the total resistance in the circuit?

A 0.25 Ω
B 2.00 Ω
C 4.00 Ω
D 18.0 Ω

6118/1/21
 13
35 Which row in the table describes electric power and its unit?

description unit
The rate of which work is done by a source in maintaining an
A Joule
electric current through an electric circuit.
The rate of which work is done by a source in maintaining an
B Watt
electric current through an electric circuit.
The work done by the source in maintaining the flow of electric
C Joule
current in an electric circuit.
The work done by the source in maintaining the flow of electric
D Watt
current in an electric circuit.

36 A transformer converts 100 V into 80 V.

The transformer has a current of 1.50 A on the secondary coil.

What is the current on the primary coil?

A 1.20 A
B 1.25 A
C 1.88 A
D 1.50 A

37 In an experiment a learner uses a bar magnet RQ to test for magnetism in a given

bar material TU.

R T

Q U

The pole R is the north seeking pole of magnet RQ. The learner concludes that bar
TU is also a magnet.

Which statement leads the learner to this conclusion?

A Pole R repels pole T and attracts pole U
B Pole R attracts pole U and attracts pole T
C Pole Q attracts pole T and attracts pole U
D Pole Q does not attract or repel pole T.

6118/1/21 [Turn over

 14
38 The diagram shows a simple d.c. electric motor which is rotating.
coil

magnet
S N magnet

Which change makes the motor rotate faster?

A increasing the number of turns on the coil
B removing the magnets
C reversing the battery
D reversing the polarity of the magnets
234
39 The nuclide notation for an isotope of Thorium is Th .
90

How many nucleons are in a nucleus of this isotope?

A 142
B 144
C 232
D 234

40 A sample contains 3600 atoms of a radioactive isotope.

The isotope has a half-life of 12 hours.

How many atoms of the isotope will remain undecayed after 2 days?
A 225 atoms
B 450 atoms
C 900 atoms
D 1800 atoms

6118/1/21
 15

BLANK PAGE

6118/1/21
 16

BLANK PAGE

The DNEA acknowledges the usage and reproduction of third party copyright material in the NSSC Assessment, with and without permission
from the copyright holder. The Namibian Government Copyright Act allows copyright material to be used limitedly and fairly for educational
and non-commercial purposes.

The Directorate of National Assessment and Examinations operates under the auspices of the Ministry of Education, Arts and Culture in
Namibia.

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/1/21
Centre Number Candidate Number Candidate Name

NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICS ORDINARY LEVEL 6118/2

PAPER 2 1 hour 30 minutes
Marks 80 2021

Additional Materials: Non-programmable calculator

Ruler

E L
INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

V
• Candidates answer on the Question Paper in the spaces provided.

E
• Write your Centre Number, Candidate Number and Name in the spaces

L
provided on top of this page. For Examiner’s Use
• Write in dark blue or black pen.

Y
• You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. 1
• Do not use correction fluid. 2

R
• Do not write in the margin For Examiner’s Use. 3

A
4
• Answer all questions.

N
5

I
6
• The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question

D
or part question. 7
8

R
• You will lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
9

O
appropriate units.
10
11
• Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e acceleration of free fall g = 10 m/s2).
Total

Marker
Checker

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/2/21 [Turn over

 2
For
Examiner’s
1 A list shows apparatus commonly found in a Physics laboratory. Use

Metre ruler
Measuring cylinder
Ruler
Micrometer screw gauge
Balance
Vernier caliper
(a) Choose the most suitable item from the list to carry out each of the following
measurements.
(i) Measure the length of a Physics text book.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Measure 10 cm3 of water.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Measure the thickness of a sheet of paper.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe how you would use a stopwatch to measure the period of a
pendulum.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]

[4]

6118/2/21
 3
For
Examiner’s
2 Fig. 2.1 shows the speed-time graphs for two cars moving on a straight level track. Use

The mass for car A is 1 000 kg while the mass of car B is 1 500 kg.
60
car A

40
speed car B
m/s
20

0
0 10 20 30 40

time/s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Determine the maximum speed of car A.

Maximum speed = ..................m/s [1]

(b) Describe the motion of
(i) car B during the last 2 seconds of the test.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) car A during the first 15 seconds.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(c) Use the graph to
(i) determine the distance travelled by car B during the 40 seconds.

Distance =.................................. m [2]

6118/2/21 [Turn over

 4
For
Examiner’s
(ii) calculate the resultant force on car B during the last 2 seconds of the test, Use

Force = ......................................N [2]

(iii) calculate the resultant force on car A from 14 seconds to 26 seconds.

Force = ......................................N [1]

(d) On the grid draw a graph of another car C that decelerates uniformly from
30 m/s to rest in 40 seconds. [1]
(e) After 40 seconds car B accelerates at 4m/s2 for a further 10 seconds.
Find the final velocity of car B.

Velocity = ................................m/s [3]

[12]

6118/2/21
 5
For
Examiner’s
3 A Grade 11 learner carried out an experiment to find the specific heat capacity Use
of an unknown block. He measured the energy supplied to the block as he heated it.
Results obtained are shown in Fig 3.1 below.

Mass of the block: 0.831 kg

Original temperature of the block: 13.1 ºC

Final temperature of the block: 41.3 ºC

Energy supplied: 23 000 J

Fig. 3.1
(a) Define specific heat capacity.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the specific heat capacity of the block.

Specific heat capacity =....................J/Kg.K [3]

[5]

6118/2/21 [Turn over

 6
For
Examiner’s
4 Fig. 4.1 shows an uncalibrated liquid-in-glass thermometer. Use
liquid capillary tube

Fig. 4.1
(a)  (i) Name a suitable liquid to use in the thermometer.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State the physical property of the liquid on which the operation of the
thermometer depends.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Give the value of the fixed points on the Kelvin temperature scale.

upper fixed point:....................................

lower fixed point:.................................... [2]

[4]

6118/2/21
 7
For
Examiner’s
5 Fig 5.1 shows a non-uniform beam of length 4.8 m and mass of 2.2 kg. Use
The beam is pivoted at its centre.
Point C marks the centre of mass of the beam. [g = 10N/kg]

0.8 m

C
pivot

Fig. 5.1
(a) Define mass.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b)  (i) Calculate the weight of the beam.

Weight = ....................................N [1]

(ii) Calculate the moment produced by the weight of the beam about the pivot.
State the unit.

Moment = ........................unit............ [3]

(iii) A weight of 16.5 N is hung on the beam.
The distance x of the weight from the pivot is adjusted until the beam
balances. This is shown in Fig. 5.2 (not drawn to scale). [g = 10N/kg]
0.8 m
x

C
pivot
16.5 N

Fig. 5.2
Calculate the distance x.

x = ............................................. m [2]
[7]
6118/2/21 [Turn over
 8
For
Examiner’s
6 Fig. 6.1 shows water waves in a ripple tank. Use
The wave fronts pass from the deep water to shallow water.

deep water shallow water

wavefront

Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the wave effect demonstrated in the experiment.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the change, if any, to these properties as the wave enters shallow water.
(i) wavelength ..................................................
(ii) frequency ..................................................
(iii) speed .................................................. [3]
(c) The wave has the speed of 0.12 m/s in the deep water.
Water waves are 0.3 m apart in the deep wave.
Calculate the frequency of the source producing the wave.

Frequency = ............................. Hz [2]

6118/2/21
 9
For
Examiner’s
(d) Fig. 6.2 shows the electromagnetic spectrum. Use

visible
micro-
radio waves infra-red Y X-rays γ-rays
waves

increasing Z

Fig 6.2
(i) Name the type of radiation found in region Y.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Electromagnetic waves all propagate with the same wave motion.
State the name of this type of wave motion.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Give the word that is represented by letter Z, on Fig. 6.2.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) Outline two safety precautions regarding the use of an X-ray.

1..........................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

2..........................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

[11]

6118/2/21 [Turn over

 10
For
Examiner’s
7 (a) Give the difference between a scalar and vector quantity. Use
Give an example for each.

Scalar quantity...........................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

Vector quantity...........................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The Fig. 7.1 is an overhead view of two tractors pulling a tree trunk.

tractors

30 000 N

20º
tree trunk
20 000 N

Fig 7.1

In the space below draw a scale diagram to determine the magnitude of

the resultant force and its direction.

Magnitude of resultant force =.........................

Direction:.......................................................... [4]

[6]

6118/2/21
 11
For
Examiner’s
8 A vehicle safety test is being carried out. Figure 8.1 shows a 1 500 kg van Use
travelling at the speed of 30 m/s. The van will collide with a car of 450 kg
travelling at a speed of 25 m/s moving in the same direction.
After the collision the two vehicles will stick together and move together before
coming to rest.

30 m/s 25 m/s

Fig. 8.1

(a) Define the principle of conservation of momentum.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the maximum total speed of the vehicles after collision.

Speed = ..................................m/s [5]

[7]

6118/2/21 [Turn over

 12
For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with three resistors. Use
24 V

8.0 Ω 4.0 Ω

6.0 Ω

Fig 9.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of the three resistors.

resistance = ...............................Ω [3]

(b) Calculate the current passing through the 6 Ω resistor.

current = .................................... A [2]

(c) Calculate the charge passing through the 4 Ω resistor in 5 minutes.

charge = .....................................C [2]

[7]

6118/2/21
 13
For
10 (a) The radioactive isotope Radium (226) emits α-particles as it decays. Examiner’s
Use
The decay of Radium produces an isotope of Radon.
(i) Describe the nature of α-particles.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The nuclear equation below shows the decay of radium-226.
226 a 4
86
Rn b
Rn + 2 α

Calculate the value of a and b.

a....................................................

b.................................................... [2]
(b) The half-life of Radium is 1600 years.
(i) Define half-life.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) At particular instant, the activity of a sample of radium-226 is 1200 Bq.
Calculate the time taken for the activity of this sample to fall to 75 Bq.

Time =...................................years [2]

(c) A workman operates a machine that uses β-particles to determine the level
of liquid in a plastic water bottle that is being filled.
Suggest why,
(i) α-particles are not suitable for the same purpose,

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) γ-rays are not suitable for the same purpose.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]

6118/2/21 [Turn over

 14
For
(d) Fig. 10.1 shows a beam of β-particles into the electric field between two Examiner’s
Use
charged plate in vacuum.
+++++++++++++++++

beam of β-particles

------------------------

Fig. 10.1
(i) By making a drawing on Fig. 10.1, show how the β-particles move as
they pass between the plates. [1]
(ii) Explain why the β-particles move in this way.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]

[10]

6118/2/21
 15
For
Examiner’s
11 A transformer consists of two coils of wire wound on a metal core. Use
Fig. 11.1 represents the transformer.

Primary coil Secondary coil

Fig. 11.1
(a) State the name of the metal from which the core is made and explain why it
is considered to be a suitable material to use.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The primary coil of the transformer is connected to the output voltage of an
A.C generator which supplies an alternating current.
(i) State the advantage of high voltage transmission.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) There are 560 turns on the primary coil and 910 turns on the secondary
coil of the transformer. The voltage between the two terminals of the
secondary coil is 78 V.
Calculate the voltage supplied by the A.C generator.

Voltage = .................................... V [2]

(iii) The current on the secondary coil is 0.5 A.
Calculate the current on the primary coil assume the transformer is
100% efficient.

Current = .................................... A [2]

[7]

6118/2/21
 16

BLANK PAGE

The DNEA acknowledges the usage and reproduction of third party copyright material in the NSSC Assessment, with and without
permission from the copyright holder. The Namibian Government Copyright Act allows copyright material to be used limitedly and fairly
for educational and non-commercial purposes.

The Directorate of National Assessment and Examinations operates under the auspices of the Ministry of Education, Arts and Culture in
Namibia.

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/2/21
 NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICS ORDINARY LEVEL 6118/1

PAPER 1 Multiple Choice 45 minutes
Marks 40 2020

Additional Materials: Multiple choice answer sheet

Non-programmable calculator
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

E L
INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

V
• Write in soft pencil.
• Make sure that you receive the multiple choice answer sheet with your examination number on it.

L E
• There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
• For each question, there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider

Y
correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.
• If you want to change an answer, thoroughly erase the one you wish to delete.

R
• The Periodic Table is printed on page 16.

A
• Read the instructions on the answer sheet carefully.

N
• Each correct answer will score one mark.

I
• Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
• All questions in this paper carry equal marks.

D
• You may use a non-programmable calculator.

O R
This document consists of 16 printed pages.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/1/20 [Turn over

926451
 2
1 Which instrument measures the height of a classroom most accurately?
A measuring tape
B metre ruler
C ruler
D vernier calipers

2 Which quantity is a vector?

A energy
B mass
C power
D weight

3 What happens as a body falls at a terminal velocity?

A Air resistance is equal to the weight of a body.
B Air resistance is higher than the weight of the body.
C The weight of a body decreases.
D The weight of a body increases.

4 The speed time graph shows part of a journey.

30
speed /ms−1

15

0 10 20
time /s

What is the acceleration?

A −0.67 m/s2
B −1.5 m/s2
C 0.67 m/s2
D 1.5 m/s2

5 The mass of an empty bottle is 5.0 g. When the bottle is filled with 20 cm3 of cooking
oil, the mass is 23.0 g.
What is the density of the cooking oil?
A 0.25 g/cm3
B 0.90 g/cm3
C 1.2 g/cm3
D 1.4 g/cm3
6118/1/20
926451
 3
6 A ball of weight 1.5 N drops through the air at terminal velocity.

A sudden breeze of wind exerts a horizontal force of 0.7 N on the ball from the right.

Which diagram shows the resultant force? The diagrams are not to scale.

A B
0.7 N 0.7 N

1.5 N 1.5 N
resultant resultant
force force

C D
resultant
force

1.5 N 1.5 N

0.7 N
0.7 N
resultant
force 1.5 N

6118/1/20 [Turn over

926451
 4
7 The diagram shows a manometer containing water of density 1000 kg/m3 connected
to a gas tap. The diagram is not to scale.

Gas
supply

0.5 m

0.1 m

What is the excess pressure of the gas supply above atmospheric pressure?
A 1000 Pa
B 3000 Pa
C 4000 Pa
D 5000 Pa

8 Which row shows what happens to the volume and density of water when it is heated
from 1 °C to 3 °C?

volume density
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases

6118/1/20
926451
 5
9 Which graph shows how the pressure of a gas changes with volume at constant
temperature?
A B

pressure pressure

volume volume

C D

pressure pressure

volume volume

10 The normal body temperature of a person is 37 °C. What is this temperature in kelvin?
A 37
B 236
C 273
D 310

11 Which physical property is used in the measurement of temperature?

A momentum
B mass
C resistance
D weight

12 A liquid-in-glass thermometer has a large change in the length of the column for a
small rise in temperature. What describes the thermometer?
A accurate
B high range
C linear
D sensitive

6118/1/20 [Turn over

926451
 6
13 A copper rod has a mass of 2 kg.

What is the amount of heat needed to raise the temperature of the object by 1 kelvin?
A the heat capacity of the rod
B the latent heat of the rod
C the specific heat capacity of copper
D the specific latent heat of copper

14 The specific heat capacity of a material is 2000 J/(kg°C).

What is the amount of energy needed to change the temperature of 2 kg of the

material from −4 °C to −1 °C?
A 0.0030 J
B 3000 J
C 12 000 J
D 16 000 J

15 What is a wave pulse?

A A single disturbance.
B A continuous up and down motion.
C A continuous backward and forward motion.
D A line joining points that are in phase.

16 Which waves are longitudinal waves?

A light waves
B sound waves
C waves on water
D x -rays

17 The diagram shows the circular waves formed after a stone is dropped in water.

C
•D
B

•
•A

Which letter shows the wave front that is formed first?

6118/1/20
926451
 7
18 Which object is not luminous?
A a lit candle
B a lit bulb
C the Moon
D the Sun

19 Which property of light leads to the formation of an umbra in an eclipse?

A Light passes through transparent objects.
B Light refracts as it enters a denser medium.
C Light travels at a very high speed.
D Light travels in straight lines.

20 A ray of light enters a water surface at an angle of incidence of 50°. The refractive
index of water is 1.3.

What is the angle of refraction?

A 36°
B 38°
C 65°
D 85°

21 An object O is placed in front of a converging lens.

The diagram shows the image I that is formed.

I O

What is the characteristic of the image?

A inverted
B real
C smaller
D virtual

6118/1/20 [Turn over

926451
 8
22 Where is ultraviolet used?
A telephone communication
B intruder alarms
C remote controllers
D sterilising equipment

23 The amplitude of a sound wave increases and the frequency remains constant.

What happens to the pitch and loudness?

pitch loudness
A increases increases
B increases stays the same
C stays the same increases
D stays the same stays the same

24 The diagram shows a neutral piece of a metal.

− + − + −
+ − + − +
− + − + −
+ − + − +

What happens when the metal becomes negatively charged?

A it gains electrons
B it gains protons
C it loses electrons
D it loses protons

25 What is the unit for charge?

A ampere
B coulomb
C ohm
D volt

26 Which electrical quantity is calculated by dividing charge by time?

A current
B power
C resistance
D voltage

6118/1/20
926451
 9
27 What is the correct symbol of the unit for potential difference?
A A
B C
C J
D V

28 Which diagram shows the change in the resistance R of a metallic conductor against
its length, l.

A B

R R

l l

C D

R R

l l

6118/1/20 [Turn over

926451
 10
29 A learner wants to determine the resistance of a light bulb.

Which diagram shows the correct set up?

A • • B

V V

• •

C D

V A

• • • •

A V

30 The diagram shows an electric circuit.

5Ω 3Ω

4Ω

5Ω

12 V
What is the total current flowing through the ammeter (A)?
A 0.67 A
B 1.6 A
C 1.4 A
D 204 A

6118/1/20
926451
 11
31 Which electrical symbol represents a device used to change a.c into d.c?

A B

C D

32 A bar magnet is placed on a piece of wood and floats freely on water.

Assume that magnetic north is to the top of the page.

Which diagram shows the position of the bar magnet at rest?
N S

S N N S
S N
A B C D
33 The diagram shows a current carrying wire placed in a magnetic field.
B wire

S A × C N

D
The direction of current is into the page.
Which letter A, B, C and D shows the direction of the force exerted on the wire?

6118/1/20 [Turn over

926451
 12
34 The diagram shows a bar magnet moving into a solenoid.
X Y

N S

Which row describes the magnetic poles induced at X and Y because of the movement?

magnetic pole at X magnetic pole at Y

A north south
B north north
C south north
D south south

6118/1/20
926451
 13
35 The diagram shows the graph of voltage against time for a simple a.c generator.

output
voltage 0.5 time/s

The frequency of rotation doubles.

Which diagram shows the new graph of voltage against time.

output
A voltage 0 0.5 time/s

output
B voltage 0
0.5 time/s

output
C voltage 0 0.5 time/s

output
D voltage 0 time/s
0.5

6118/1/20 [Turn over

926451
 14
36 The diagram shows a transformer. The voltage on the primary is 16 V.
The secondary coil has 80 turns and there is a current of 4.0 A through the 2.0 Ω
resistor.
80 turns

4.0 A
A
2.0 Ω
16 V
output

How many turns are there on the primary coil?

A 40
B 160
C 320
D 640

37 Which particles are found in the nucleus of an atom?

A electrons and protons
B neutrons and protons
C neutrons only
D protons only

38 A wooden box is used to store radioactive sources.

Which material is used in the lining of the box to stop most of the radioactive particles
form escaping?
A aluminium
B iron
C lead
D paper

39 Which of the following has the most ionising effect?

A alpha - particle
B beta - particle
C gamma - ray
D x - ray

6118/1/20
926451
 15
40 When a nucleus emits a beta particle, the number of protons and neutrons change.

Which row shows this change?

number of neutrons number of protons

A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases

6118/1/20 [Turn over

926451
 DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

Group

I II III IV V VI VII 0

1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
23 24 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon

926451
16

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon

6118/1/20
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89 †
*58 - 71 Lanthanoid series 140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
†90 - 103 Actinoid series Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Key a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
b = proton (atomic) number Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Centre Number Candidate Number Candidate Name

NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICS ORDINARY LEVEL 6118/2

PAPER 2 1 hour 30 minutes
Marks 80 2020

Additional Materials: Non-programmable calculator

Ruler

L
INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

E
• Candidates answer on the Question Paper in the spaces provided.

V
• Write your Centre Number, Candidate Number and Name in the spaces
provided on top of this page.

E
• Write in dark blue or black pen.

L
• You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
• Do not use correction fluid. For Examiner’s Use

Y
• Do not write in the margin For Examiner’s Use.
1

R
• Answer all questions. 2

A
3

N
• 4
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question

I
or part question. 5

D
6
• You will lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
7

R
appropriate units.
8

O
• Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e acceleration of free fall g = 10 m/s2). 9
• The Periodic Table is printed on page 18. 10
Total

Marker
Checker

This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE

© MoEAC/DNEA 6118/2/20 [Turn over

926452
 2
For
Examiner’s
1 Fig 1.1 shows two 50 kg boxes of books placed on the floor. The two boxes Use
together exert a pressure of 3.6 kPa on the floor.

50 kg

50 kg

Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the
(i) weight of one box of books

Weight = ....................................N [1]

(ii) contact area of the boxes with the floor. Show your working.

Contact area =.......................... m2 [1]

6118/2/20
926452
 3
For
Examiner’s
(b) A man pulls one box along the ground over a distance of 12 m at an angle Use
of 20°, with a horizontal force of 500 N as shown in Fig 1.2.

F
ce
for
ion
ns
Te
50 kg 20°
horizontal force = 500 N

12 m

Fig. 1.2
(i) Calculate the work done by the man when he pulls the box for a distance
of 12 m. Show your working.

Work done = ...............................J [1]

(ii) The string with which the man pulls the box causes a horizontal and
vertical force on the box, as shown in Fig. 1.3.

NOT TO
SCALE
ceF
n for
n sio
Te vertical force

20°
500 N
Fig. 1.3
The tension force F in the string is the resultant of the horizontal and
the vertical force.
Using Fig. 1.3, calculate the magnitude of the tension force F.

Tension force =...........................N [2]

6118/2/20 [Turn over

926452
 4
For
Examiner’s
(c) Describe the difference between moment and work. Use

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]

[7]

6118/2/20
926452
 5
For
Examiner’s
2 Fig 2.1 shows a toy train A of mass 3.0 kg as it moves from point X toward a toy Use
train B of mass 2.0 kg. Train B is initially at rest and stationed at point Y.

Before collision After collision

v
Train A Train B Train A Train B
3 kg 2 kg 3 kg 2 kg
•
X
•
Y
Fig. 2.1
The two toy trains collide, stick together, and move off with the same velocity, v,
with each other.
(a) State two forces acting on the toy train A as it moves.

1.................................................................................................................

2................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig 2.2 shows the speed-time graph of the toy train A as it moves from
point X to point Y. The train reaches point Y at time 5.0 s.

0.8

0.6
speed/ms−1

0.4

0.2

0 1 2 3 4 5
time/s
Fig. 2.2
Describe the motion of toy train A as it moves from X to point Y.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Using the graph, determine the distance between point X and Y.

Distance..................................... m [2]

6118/2/20 [Turn over

926452
 6
For
Examiner’s
(d)  (i) State the law of conservation of momentum. Use

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the velocity of A and B after collision

Velocity....................................m/s [2]

[10]

6118/2/20
926452
 7
For
Examiner’s
3 A car travels from an area of high altitude to the coastal area of Swakopmund Use
on a hot day.
(a) At the start of the journey, the temperature of the tyres increases.
(i) State what happens to the gas particles in the tyre as the temperature
increases.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State and explain what effect the increase in temperature has on the
pressure of gas in the tyre.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [3]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a hydraulic jack raising a car. Pressure is transmitted from
piston A to piston B in the hydraulic jack.

Effort
Piston A
0.010 m2 Piston B
Load

oil

Fig. 3.1
(i) The cross-sectional area of piston A is 0.010 m2. A force of 40 N is
applied on piston A.
Calculate the pressure produced by piston A on the oil.

pressure = ................................ Pa [2]

6118/2/20 [Turn over

926452
 8
For
Examiner’s
(ii) State the pressure on piston B when the pistons stop moving. Use
Explain your answer.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

[8]

6118/2/20
926452
 9
For
Examiner’s
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a large electric kettle used to boil water. Use

water

heating element

Fig. 4.1
(a)  (i) Name the main method of heat transfer from the heating element to
the water.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain how the heat is transferred throughout the water.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(b) The kettle is filled with 5.0 kg of water at 25°C. After 15 minutes the water
starts to boil. The electric kettle does not switch off. The specific latent heat
of vaporisation is 2 230 000 J/kg.
(i) Define specific latent heat

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the amount of energy needed to change 3.0 kg of water at
100°C to steam.

energy = ......................................J [2]

[7]
6118/2/20 [Turn over
926452
 10
For
Examiner’s
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows six wavefronts of a wave travelling on the surface of shallow Use
water. The wave passes from shallow water into deep water.

direction of wave

shallow water deep water

Fig. 5.1
The speed of the wave in deep water is 0.90 m/s. In shallow water, the
speed of the wave is 0.60 m/s and the wavelength is 0.010 m.
(i) Draw three wavefronts in the deep water. [2]
(ii) Calculate the frequency of the wave in shallow water.
Give the unit of your answer.

frequency = .................................. [3]

(iii) Calculate the wavelength of the wave in deep water. Show your
working.

wavelength = ............................ m [2]

6118/2/20
926452
 11
For
Examiner’s
(b) Fig 5.2 shows a ray of light passing through a rectangular glass block. Use
line w

z
ray of light x y

Fig. 5.2
(i) State the name of line w.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Identify which of the angles x, y or z, represents the critical angle.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(c) Fig. 5.3 shows a diagram of white light ray striking a rain water droplet.
whi
te li
ght
ray

water droplet

Fig. 5.3
With reference to Fig. 5.3, explain how rainbows are formed.
You may complete Fig. 5.3 to illustrate your answer.
Use the terms internal reflection, refraction and dispersion in your answer.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]

[11]

6118/2/20 [Turn over

926452
 12
For
Examiner’s
6 Fig. 6.1 shows an object, O, which is 5.0 cm in front of a plane mirror. Use
5.0 cm

mirror
object O
•

Fig. 6.1
(a)  (i) Complete the two rays to locate the position of the image O and mark it I. [2]
(ii) Apart from its position, state two characteristics of the image I.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

6118/2/20
926452
 13
For
Examiner’s
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a bat and a series of compressions and rarefactions of the Use
sound wave that it makes.
bat

compressions and
rarefractions

Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, mark one wavelength of the wave. [1]
(ii) The speed of sound in copper is 5 000 m/s and the speed of sound in
air is 330 m/s.
Explain why sound travels faster in copper than in air.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Describe how a bat makes use of echoes to find food.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [3]

[9]

6118/2/20 [Turn over

926452
 14
For
Examiner’s
7 The diagram shows an arrangement in an electric circuit. Use

heater Ratings
220 V

X 2200 W

(a) State the purpose of X in the circuit and describe how it operates.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(b)  (i) Express 2200W in kilowatts (kW)

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Calculate the amount of electrical energy consumed if the heater is
switched on for 4 hours.

energy = ................................ kWh [2]

(iii) The cost of one kWh of electricity is N$1.14.
Calculate the cost of using the heater for 4 hours. Show your working.

cost = N$...................................... [2]

(c) Suggest two ways in which electrical energy can be conserved at home.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]

[9]

6118/2/20
926452
 15
For
Examiner’s
8 The diagram represents a DC motor. Use

•
N S

A • B

(a)  (i) State the names of the parts labelled A and B.

A.........................................................................................................

B......................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Describe and explain the action of part B.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Describe the energy conversion which takes place in the DC motor.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) State two ways in which the turning effect of the motor can be increased.

1.................................................................................................................

2................................................................................................................. [2]

[8]

6118/2/20 [Turn over

926452
 16
For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows 24 000 V overhead cables used for the transmission of Use
electrical energy. Transformer B connects overhead cables to a school.

(24 000 V) overhead coil X

cables input current of 0.5 A

school
generator

power transformer A transformer B coil Y

station
output voltage of 240 V

Fig. 9.1

(a) State the type of transformer labelled A.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Name the process that produces the voltage in coil Y.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The input voltage to transformer B is 24 000 V and the input current is 0.5 A.
The output voltage of coil Y is 240 V.
Calculate the output current in coil Y, assuming that the transformer is 100%
efficient. Show your working.

current........................................ A [2]
(d) One advantage of burying a power line underground is that thick cables can
be used.
Explain why it is useful to use thick cables.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]

[5]

6118/2/20
926452
 17
For
Examiner’s
10 The pie chart in Fig. 10.1 shows the relative contributions made by different Use
sources of background radiation.

power stations and

weapons testing

food

cosmic rays
radon gas
medical

rocks

Fig. 10.1
(a) State what is meant by background radiation.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Determine which source in Fig. 10.1 makes the smallest contribution to
background radiation.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The equation shows the radioactive decay of radon-220.
220 220 0
86
Rn → ..........Fr + ..........e

(i) Complete the equation by filling in the missing information. [2]

(ii) The half-life of radon-222 is 3.8 days.
Calculate the time it takes for 800 μg of radon-222 to decay to 25 μg.

time = ....................................days [2]

[6]

6118/2/20
926452
 DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

Group

I II III IV V VI VII 0

1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
23 24 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
18

Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon

926452
6118/2/20
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89 †
*58 - 71 Lanthanoid series 140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
†90 - 103 Actinoid series Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Key a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
b = proton (atomic) number Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
 19

BLANK PAGE

6118/2/20
926452
 20

BLANK PAGE

6118/2/20
926452
 Cambridge O Level

PHYSICS 5054/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2024
1 hour

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.

*1700381584*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet

Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 40.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 16 pages.

IB24 06_5054_11/2RP
© UCLES 2024 [Turn over
 2

1 A measuring cylinder containing water is placed on a top-pan balance. An object is placed into
the measuring cylinder.

cm3 cm3
25 25
20 20
15 15
10 10
5 5

20 g 54 g

What is the mass and what is the volume of the object?

mass volume
/g / cm3

A 10 7
B 10 34
C 34 10
D 34 17

2 Which quantity is a vector?

A distance
B force
C mass
D speed

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 3

3 The table shows the distance travelled by a car in each 2 s time interval during a 12 s period of its
journey.

time interval / s 0–2 2–4 4–6 6–8 8–10 10–12

distance travelled
10 10 11 13 16 23
in time interval / m

Which statement describes the motion of the car?

A moving with constant speed from 0–4 s, followed by non-uniform acceleration

B moving with constant speed from 0–4 s, then uniform acceleration
C at rest from 0–4 s, then non-uniform acceleration
D at rest from 0–4 s, then uniform acceleration

4 Two cubes, X and Y, have the same mass, but the length of a side of X is twice that of Y.
density of X
What is the value of the ratio ?
density of Y
A 0.125 B 1.0 C 4.0 D 8.0

5 An object slides down a frictionless slope as shown.

As the object presses on the surface, the surface pushes back on the object.

In which direction does the surface push back on the object?

B
C

direction of motion

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 4

6 A car, travelling on a straight road, brakes and comes to a stop.

Which row gives the expression for calculating the thinking distance and gives a variable that
affects thinking distance?

expression for calculating variable that affects

thinking distance thinking distance

A braking distance + stopping distance load carried

B braking distance + stopping distance speed of car
C stopping distance – braking distance load carried
D stopping distance – braking distance speed of car

7 An unstretched spring of length 15.0 cm stretches by 4.0 cm when a mass of weight 6.0 N is
suspended from it. The spring does not exceed the limit of proportionality.

What is the total length of the spring when the weight of the suspended mass is 3.0 N?

A 2.0 cm B 7.5 cm C 9.5 cm D 17.0 cm

8 Which statements describing the moment of a force about a pivot are correct?

1 The moment of a force is a measure of the turning effect of the force.

2 The moment of a force is equal to the force  perpendicular distance from the pivot.

3 The moment of a force is equal to the force  pressure on the pivot.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 only D 3 only

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 5

9 Four objects have identical shapes but different distributions of mass.

The centre of gravity of each object is shown by the dot marked G.

Which object is the most stable?

A B

G
G

C D

10 An object of mass 5.0 kg is pushed up a slope at a steady speed of 2.0 m / s.

3.0 m

8.0 m

Which calculation gives the change in gravitational potential energy from the bottom to the top?

A 0.50  5.0  2.0

B 5.0  9.8  3.0

C 0.50  5.0  2.0 2

D 5.0  9.8  8.0

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 6

11 A student of mass 60 kg climbs some steps. He travels a horizontal distance of 2.0 m and a
vertical distance of 1.5 m.

NOT TO
1.5 m SCALE

2.0 m

What is the work done against the force of gravity?

A 88 J B 118 J C 880 J D 1200 J

12 Which method of producing electricity does not involve a turbine?

A hydroelectric power station

B nuclear power station
C solar cells
D wind generator

13 The input power to a lamp is 6.0 W. The lamp wastes 2.7 J of energy in 3.0 s.

What is the efficiency of the lamp?

A 0.15 B 0.45 C 0.55 D 0.85

14 A camera is taken under water and left at a depth of 8.0 m.

atmospheric pressure = 100 000 Pa

density of water = 1000 kg / m3

What is the total pressure acting on the camera?

A 22 000 Pa B 78 000 Pa C 110 000 Pa D 178 000 Pa

15 In which example are the particles in fixed positions?

A ice in an ice cube

B water in a lake
C air in an air bubble
D water vapour in the atmosphere

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 7

16 A gas expands slowly and its temperature remains constant.

What happens to the gas particles?

A They move further apart and their average speed decreases.

B They move further apart and their average speed increases.
C They move further apart and their average speed remains unchanged.
D They stay the same distance apart and their average speed decreases.

17 The air in each of four syringes is slowly compressed so that the temperature of the air stays
constant. The volumes before and after compression for each syringe are given in the table.

The air in all four syringes is initially at the same pressure.

Which syringe shows the smallest pressure change?

volume before volume after

compression / cm3 compression / cm3

A 50 10
B 100 50
C 400 25
D 400 100

18 The temperature of a substance is measured with a liquid-in-glass thermometer.

Which physical property changes so that the temperature can be measured?

A length of the thermometer

B mass of the liquid
C specific heat capacity of the liquid
D volume of the liquid

19 Boiling and evaporation are different processes.

Which statement is correct?

A Boiling only occurs at the surface of a liquid.

B Evaporation only occurs when the temperature of the liquid is high enough.
C Evaporation does not change the temperature of a liquid.
D When a boiling liquid is heated its temperature remains constant.

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 8

20 A glass beaker contains water. When the centre of the base of the beaker is heated, a convection
current is set up.

glass beaker

convection
current

water

heat

Which statement explains this?

A The evaporation of water causes water molecules to rise to the surface.

B The expansion of water molecules causes them to rise to the surface.
C The water above the heat source rises because it becomes less dense.
D The water at the side falls because it becomes less dense.

21 A hot meal is supplied in a container made of shiny metal foil.

Why does the container help to keep the food hot?

A The container traps air which increases convection.

B The foil is a poor thermal conductor.
C Shiny metal foil is a good absorber of infrared radiation.
D Shiny metal foil is a poor emitter of infrared radiation.

22 Which quantity is defined as the number of wavelengths passing a point per second?

A amplitude
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 9

23 A plane mirror forms the image of an object.

What are characteristics of the image formed?

size type

A same as object real

B same as object virtual
C smaller than object real
D smaller than object virtual

24 A ray of light strikes the surface of a glass block at an angle of incidence of 45.

The refractive index of the glass is 1.8.

What is the angle of refraction inside the block?

A 23 B 25 C 45 D 81

25 Which diagram shows rays of light passing through a converging lens?

A B C D

lens lens lens lens

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 10

26 A beam of white light is incident on a glass prism.

X
white
light

X and Y are the two ends of the visible spectrum.

Which statement is correct?

A All the light travels at the same speed in the prism.

B The light at X has a lower frequency than the light at Y.
C The light at X refracts more as it leaves the prism than the light at Y.
D The white light refracts away from the normal as it enters the prism.

27 Which components of the electromagnetic spectrum are used to communicate from a remote
controller to a television set and from the Earth to a satellite?

remote controller the Earth to

to TV set a satellite

A infrared microwave
B infrared ultraviolet
C light microwave
D light ultraviolet

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 11

28 A student claps his hands in front of a wall and hears the echoes. He claps at the same moment
as he hears the echo of the previous clap.

Another student starts a stop-watch on the first clap and stops it on the eleventh clap. The
reading on the stop-watch is 9.4 s and the speed of sound is 320 m / s.

NOT TO
SCALE
student

wall

What is the distance x between the student and the wall?

A 140 m B 150 m C 270 m D 300 m

29 A compass is placed close to a strong bar magnet and pivots to the position shown.

X
compass
strong
bar magnet

Which type of magnet is a compass needle and what is pole X?

A The needle is an induced magnet and X is a north magnetic pole.

B The needle is an induced magnet and X is a south magnetic pole.
C The needle is a permanent magnet and X is a north magnetic pole.
D The needle is a permanent magnet and X is a south magnetic pole.

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 12

30 Plastic and wool are insulating materials.

Samples of plastic and wool are rubbed together. This causes a transfer of electrons.

Which row shows the direction of electron transfer and the final charge on both materials?

final charge final charge

plastic wool
on plastic on wool

A gains electrons loses electrons neutral positive

B gains electrons loses electrons negative positive
C loses electrons gains electrons negative positive
D loses electrons gains electrons positive neutral

31 Which circuit contains a heater and a fuse?

A B

C D

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 13

32 A light-dependent resistor (LDR) is to be used as an input sensor for an intruder alarm circuit.
When there is no light on the LDR, the lamp switches on.

The resistance of the fixed resistor is less than that of the lamp.

Which diagram shows the circuit?

A B

C D

33 A potential difference of 4.0 V produces a current of 3.0 A in a resistor.

How much energy is transferred to thermal energy during 10 s?

A 12 J B 30 J C 40 J D 120 J

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 14

34 The diagram shows a generator.

rotation
of coil
coil

N X

What are X and Y?

X Y

A N pole split-ring commutator

B N pole slip rings
C S pole split-ring commutator
D S pole slip rings

35 The diagram shows a loudspeaker that is producing a sound.

magnet
N

S
loudspeaker coil of wire
cone N

A student writes four sentences about the loudspeaker.

1 There is a direct current in the coil of wire.

2 The current in the coil produces a changing magnetic field.
3 A force is produced on the coil of wire attached to the cone.
4 The cone spins around due to the force.

Which sentences are correct?

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 15

36 A step-down transformer changes 240 V a.c. to 12 V a.c. There are 600 turns on the primary coil.

How many turns are on the secondary coil?

A 20 B 30 C 600 D 12 000

37 Alpha particles are directed at a thin gold foil.

Only a very small proportion of the alpha particles are deflected through very large angles.

Which fact about the nuclei of the gold atoms is not a conclusion of this experiment?

A They are surrounded by mostly empty space.

B They are very small.
C They contain most of the mass of the atom.
D They contain protons and neutrons.

38 A radioactive source emitting only gamma radiation is placed in front of a radiation detector which
measures the count rate.

What must cause the count rate to increase?

A a thick sheet of lead placed between the source and the detector
B a strong magnetic field placed between the source and the detector
C the radioactive source moved closer to the detector
D the detector moved further away from the radioactive source

39 Nuclear fusion is one source of energy.

What is nuclear fusion?

A the decay of a radioactive nucleus

B the joining together of two nuclei to make a larger nucleus
C the melting of an unstable nucleus
D the splitting of a nucleus into two lighter nuclei

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 16

40 Which statement is correct?

A The orbital speed of the Earth around the Sun is:

2  average diameter of the orbit

.
orbital period

B The orbit of the Earth around the Sun is an ellipse.

C The Moon takes approximately one month to orbit the Sun.
D Light from the Sun takes 5.0 minutes to reach the Earth.

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 Cambridge O Level

PHYSICS 5054/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2024
1 hour

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.

*4111481595*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet

Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 40.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB24 06_5054_12/4RP
© UCLES 2024 [Turn over
 2

1 What is measured using a micrometer?

A area
B current
C length
D mass

2 Two people pull on ropes to move a boat along a canal.

canal boat

The boat moves at a constant velocity.

The vector diagram for the tension in the ropes is shown.

Which vector is the drag acting on the boat?

A B C D

3 The graph shows how the speed of a car travelling in a straight line changes with time.

Which section shows the largest acceleration?

C
speed B

A D

0
0 time

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 3

4 A man walks along a path from X to Y. The diagram shows the path from above.

X Y

The man measures the distance he walks and the time taken.

Which quantity can be calculated using this data only?

A acceleration
B average speed
C average velocity
D power

5 Which property of an object determines its resistance to a change from its state of rest or motion?

A its mass
B its shape
C its surface area
D its volume

6 The diagram shows a moon buggy used by astronauts.

moon buggy

The mass of the moon buggy on the Earth is 210 kg. The gravitational field strength on the Moon
is 16 of that on the Earth.

What is the weight of the moon buggy on the Moon?

A zero B 35 N C 210 N D 340 N

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 4

7 A car travels along a road. The force on the car due to the engine is 800 N.

The motion of the car depends on the value of the total resistive force R.

R 800 N

Which row shows the motion of the car for the given value of R?

value of resistive
motion
force R / N

A 500 deceleration
B 800 acceleration
C 900 deceleration
D 1000 acceleration

8 Four of the gravitational forces that act between objects in the Solar System are listed.

P the force on the Moon due to the Earth

Q the force on the Earth due to the Sun
R the force on the Earth due to the Moon
S the force on the Moon due to the Sun

Which two forces are a Newton’s third law pair?

A P and Q B P and R C Q and S D R and S

9 A box is moved up a rough slope from X to Y.

The diagram shows four forces acting on the box.

Which force is the force due to friction on the box?

D Y
A

C
B
X

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 5

10 The graph shows how the extension of four different threads depends on the load attached.

Which thread is the most difficult to stretch over the range of loads shown?

A
extension B
C

0
0 load

11 A satellite orbits a planet in a circular path as shown. It has constant speed.

There is a force on the satellite due to the planet.

In which direction is the force on the satellite when it is in the position shown?

A satellite NOT TO
planet B SCALE

direction of
D movement
C

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 6

12 A crane has a 5800 N counterweight positioned 2.3 m from the tower along a horizontal jib.

The centre of gravity P of the crane jib is marked.

jib

counterweight
P
2.3 m

5800 N

2300 N

What is the horizontal distance between the 2300 N load and P so that there is no moment
about P?

A 0.91 m B 3.5 m C 5.8 m D 8.1 m

13 A car of mass 750 kg travels 400 m at 25 m / s. It then accelerates to 35 m / s and travels a further
400 m.

What is the change in the momentum of the car due to acceleration?

A 7500 kg m / s
B 24 000 kg m / s
C 45 000 kg m / s
D 75 000 kg m / s

14 A ball is dropped from rest at the top of a building. Air resistance is negligible.

The velocity of the ball is 14 m / s when it hits the ground.

What is the height of the building?

A 2.9 m B 10 m C 20 m D 40 m

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 7

15 Which energy source is available constantly over a 24-hour period?

A natural gas
B solar cells
C tidal
D wind

16 A 15 W lamp is turned on for 30 minutes. It wastes 7000 J of energy.

What is the efficiency of the lamp?

A 0.26 B 0.35 C 0.59 D 0.74

17 Which quantity is not measured in joules (J)?

A gravitational potential energy

B latent heat
C power
D work

18 Which description of a liquid is correct?

A fixed shape, fixed volume

B fixed shape, variable volume
C variable shape, fixed volume
D variable shape, variable volume

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 8

19 A transparent box has a dividing wall in its middle. It contains two different gases, one in each
half, as shown.

dividing wall

brown gas colourless gas

The dividing wall is removed. The box is left for a long time. The gases do not react.

What is then seen in the box?

A brown gas on the right and colourless gas on the left

B pale brown gas throughout
C several distinct clouds of colourless and brown gas throughout
D colourless gas on the right and brown gas on the left

20 A bottle containing a cold liquid is placed on a table on a warm day. Drops of water form on the
outside of the bottle.

Which process causes the drops to form?

A condensation
B conduction
C convection
D evaporation

21 What is the specific heat capacity of a liquid?

A the difference between the boiling temperature and the melting temperature of the liquid
B the energy required to change the state of 1 kg of the liquid

C the energy required to heat 1 kg of the liquid through 1 C

D the increase in temperature of the liquid when it is heated

22 Which statement about infrared radiation is correct?

A In a vacuum, infrared radiation travels at the speed of light.

B Infrared radiation is a longitudinal wave.
C Infrared radiation has a higher frequency than ultraviolet radiation.
D White surfaces are better emitters of infrared radiation than black surfaces.

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 9

23 The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.

Which sound is classed as ultrasound?

A a sound with a wavelength of 250 cm

B a sound with a wavelength of 25 cm
C a sound with a wavelength of 2.5 cm
D none of the above

24 Which diagram shows how light from a distant object forms an image in a normal eye?

A B

C D

25 The colour of visible light is related to the wavelength of the light.

Which list of colours is in order of increasing wavelength?

A blue  green  yellow  red

B blue  green  red  yellow

C green  red  yellow  blue

D red  yellow  green  blue

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 10

26 A thin converging lens is used as a magnifying glass.

Which row gives the nature of the image produced and an expression that is the linear
magnification?

expression for
nature of image
linear magnification
image length
A real
object length

object length
B real
image length

image length
C virtual
object length

object length
D virtual
image length

27 Which application is not a use for ultrasound?

A cleaning jewellery
B scanning an unborn baby
C sonar
D sterilising water

28 Which equation is correct for potential difference (p.d.)?

A p.d. = voltage  current

energy
B p.d. =
time

C p.d. = work done

charge

current
D p.d. =
resistance

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 11

29 The diagrams show five electrical circuits. All of the resistors shown are identical.

1 2 3 4 5

Which circuits have equal resistance?

A 1, 2, 3 and 5
B 1, 2, 4 and 5
C 1, 3, 4 and 5
D 2, 3, 4 and 5

30 Which electrical appliance uses the heating effect of electricity?

A a cell phone (mobile phone)

B a fan
C a hairdryer
D a lawnmower

31 How many kilowatt-hours of energy are used by a 1000 W heater connected to a 230 V supply for
30 minutes?

A 0.30 kW h B 0.50 kW h C 30 kW h D 120 kW h

32 Which safety precautions must be taken when wiring an electrical kettle that has a stainless-steel
outer casing?

A It must be earthed and have a fuse in the live wire.

B It must be earthed and have a fuse in the neutral wire.
C It needs a fuse in the live wire but does not need to be earthed.
D It needs a fuse in the neutral wire but does not need to be earthed.

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 12

33 What is the purpose of the earth wire in a plug connected to an appliance?

A to complete the circuit so that the appliance works

B to conduct thermal energy so that the appliance does not get too hot
C to prevent a person getting a shock
D to protect the appliance from a current that is too large

34 The diagram shows a wire carrying a current in a magnetic field.

current

magnetic
field

What is the direction of the force on the wire?

A left to right
B right to left
C into the page
D out of the page

35 The diagram shows a simple d.c. motor.

What is the part labelled Q?

A a coil
B a magnet
C a slip ring
D a split-ring commutator

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 13

36 The diagram shows a transformer.

soft iron core

primary coil secondary coil

A student writes four statements about how the transformer works.

1 An alternating voltage across the primary coil induces an unchanging voltage across
the secondary coil.
2 An alternating voltage across the primary coil produces a changing magnetic field in
the iron core.
3 A changing magnetic field in the iron core induces an alternating voltage across the
secondary coil.
4 An unchanging voltage across the primary coil produces a changing magnetic field
across the secondary coil.

Which statements explain how the transformer works?

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

37 Which particle has the smallest mass?

A alpha particle
B electron
C neutron
D proton

38 Which two atoms are isotopes of the same element?

number of number of
atom
neutrons protons

1 22 12
2 22 14
3 25 13
4 24 14

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 14

39 Four types of ionising radiation are listed.

● alpha particles
● beta particles
● X-rays
● gamma rays

Which types of radiation can be emitted from the unstable nuclei of a radioactive material?

A alpha particles, beta particles and gamma rays

B alpha particles and beta particles only
C gamma rays only
D X-rays and gamma rays

40 What is the nuclear reaction that powers the Sun?

A the fission of hydrogen into helium

B the fission of helium into hydrogen
C the fusion of hydrogen into helium
D the fusion of helium into hydrogen

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 Cambridge O Level

PHYSICS 5054/11
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2024
1 hour

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.

*1700381584*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet

Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 40.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 16 pages.

IB24 06_5054_11/2RP
© UCLES 2024 [Turn over
 2

1 A measuring cylinder containing water is placed on a top-pan balance. An object is placed into
the measuring cylinder.

cm3 cm3
25 25
20 20
15 15
10 10
5 5

20 g 54 g

What is the mass and what is the volume of the object?

mass volume
/g / cm3

A 10 7
B 10 34
C 34 10
D 34 17

2 Which quantity is a vector?

A distance
B force
C mass
D speed

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 3

3 The table shows the distance travelled by a car in each 2 s time interval during a 12 s period of its
journey.

time interval / s 0–2 2–4 4–6 6–8 8–10 10–12

distance travelled
10 10 11 13 16 23
in time interval / m

Which statement describes the motion of the car?

A moving with constant speed from 0–4 s, followed by non-uniform acceleration

B moving with constant speed from 0–4 s, then uniform acceleration
C at rest from 0–4 s, then non-uniform acceleration
D at rest from 0–4 s, then uniform acceleration

4 Two cubes, X and Y, have the same mass, but the length of a side of X is twice that of Y.
density of X
What is the value of the ratio ?
density of Y
A 0.125 B 1.0 C 4.0 D 8.0

5 An object slides down a frictionless slope as shown.

As the object presses on the surface, the surface pushes back on the object.

In which direction does the surface push back on the object?

B
C

direction of motion

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 4

6 A car, travelling on a straight road, brakes and comes to a stop.

Which row gives the expression for calculating the thinking distance and gives a variable that
affects thinking distance?

expression for calculating variable that affects

thinking distance thinking distance

A braking distance + stopping distance load carried

B braking distance + stopping distance speed of car
C stopping distance – braking distance load carried
D stopping distance – braking distance speed of car

7 An unstretched spring of length 15.0 cm stretches by 4.0 cm when a mass of weight 6.0 N is
suspended from it. The spring does not exceed the limit of proportionality.

What is the total length of the spring when the weight of the suspended mass is 3.0 N?

A 2.0 cm B 7.5 cm C 9.5 cm D 17.0 cm

8 Which statements describing the moment of a force about a pivot are correct?

1 The moment of a force is a measure of the turning effect of the force.

2 The moment of a force is equal to the force  perpendicular distance from the pivot.

3 The moment of a force is equal to the force  pressure on the pivot.

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 only D 3 only

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 5

9 Four objects have identical shapes but different distributions of mass.

The centre of gravity of each object is shown by the dot marked G.

Which object is the most stable?

A B

G
G

C D

10 An object of mass 5.0 kg is pushed up a slope at a steady speed of 2.0 m / s.

3.0 m

8.0 m

Which calculation gives the change in gravitational potential energy from the bottom to the top?

A 0.50  5.0  2.0

B 5.0  9.8  3.0

C 0.50  5.0  2.0 2

D 5.0  9.8  8.0

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 6

11 A student of mass 60 kg climbs some steps. He travels a horizontal distance of 2.0 m and a
vertical distance of 1.5 m.

NOT TO
1.5 m SCALE

2.0 m

What is the work done against the force of gravity?

A 88 J B 118 J C 880 J D 1200 J

12 Which method of producing electricity does not involve a turbine?

A hydroelectric power station

B nuclear power station
C solar cells
D wind generator

13 The input power to a lamp is 6.0 W. The lamp wastes 2.7 J of energy in 3.0 s.

What is the efficiency of the lamp?

A 0.15 B 0.45 C 0.55 D 0.85

14 A camera is taken under water and left at a depth of 8.0 m.

atmospheric pressure = 100 000 Pa

density of water = 1000 kg / m3

What is the total pressure acting on the camera?

A 22 000 Pa B 78 000 Pa C 110 000 Pa D 178 000 Pa

15 In which example are the particles in fixed positions?

A ice in an ice cube

B water in a lake
C air in an air bubble
D water vapour in the atmosphere

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 7

16 A gas expands slowly and its temperature remains constant.

What happens to the gas particles?

A They move further apart and their average speed decreases.

B They move further apart and their average speed increases.
C They move further apart and their average speed remains unchanged.
D They stay the same distance apart and their average speed decreases.

17 The air in each of four syringes is slowly compressed so that the temperature of the air stays
constant. The volumes before and after compression for each syringe are given in the table.

The air in all four syringes is initially at the same pressure.

Which syringe shows the smallest pressure change?

volume before volume after

compression / cm3 compression / cm3

A 50 10
B 100 50
C 400 25
D 400 100

18 The temperature of a substance is measured with a liquid-in-glass thermometer.

Which physical property changes so that the temperature can be measured?

A length of the thermometer

B mass of the liquid
C specific heat capacity of the liquid
D volume of the liquid

19 Boiling and evaporation are different processes.

Which statement is correct?

A Boiling only occurs at the surface of a liquid.

B Evaporation only occurs when the temperature of the liquid is high enough.
C Evaporation does not change the temperature of a liquid.
D When a boiling liquid is heated its temperature remains constant.

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 8

20 A glass beaker contains water. When the centre of the base of the beaker is heated, a convection
current is set up.

glass beaker

convection
current

water

heat

Which statement explains this?

A The evaporation of water causes water molecules to rise to the surface.

B The expansion of water molecules causes them to rise to the surface.
C The water above the heat source rises because it becomes less dense.
D The water at the side falls because it becomes less dense.

21 A hot meal is supplied in a container made of shiny metal foil.

Why does the container help to keep the food hot?

A The container traps air which increases convection.

B The foil is a poor thermal conductor.
C Shiny metal foil is a good absorber of infrared radiation.
D Shiny metal foil is a poor emitter of infrared radiation.

22 Which quantity is defined as the number of wavelengths passing a point per second?

A amplitude
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 9

23 A plane mirror forms the image of an object.

What are characteristics of the image formed?

size type

A same as object real

B same as object virtual
C smaller than object real
D smaller than object virtual

24 A ray of light strikes the surface of a glass block at an angle of incidence of 45.

The refractive index of the glass is 1.8.

What is the angle of refraction inside the block?

A 23 B 25 C 45 D 81

25 Which diagram shows rays of light passing through a converging lens?

A B C D

lens lens lens lens

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 10

26 A beam of white light is incident on a glass prism.

X
white
light

X and Y are the two ends of the visible spectrum.

Which statement is correct?

A All the light travels at the same speed in the prism.

B The light at X has a lower frequency than the light at Y.
C The light at X refracts more as it leaves the prism than the light at Y.
D The white light refracts away from the normal as it enters the prism.

27 Which components of the electromagnetic spectrum are used to communicate from a remote
controller to a television set and from the Earth to a satellite?

remote controller the Earth to

to TV set a satellite

A infrared microwave
B infrared ultraviolet
C light microwave
D light ultraviolet

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 11

28 A student claps his hands in front of a wall and hears the echoes. He claps at the same moment
as he hears the echo of the previous clap.

Another student starts a stop-watch on the first clap and stops it on the eleventh clap. The
reading on the stop-watch is 9.4 s and the speed of sound is 320 m / s.

NOT TO
SCALE
student

wall

What is the distance x between the student and the wall?

A 140 m B 150 m C 270 m D 300 m

29 A compass is placed close to a strong bar magnet and pivots to the position shown.

X
compass
strong
bar magnet

Which type of magnet is a compass needle and what is pole X?

A The needle is an induced magnet and X is a north magnetic pole.

B The needle is an induced magnet and X is a south magnetic pole.
C The needle is a permanent magnet and X is a north magnetic pole.
D The needle is a permanent magnet and X is a south magnetic pole.

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 12

30 Plastic and wool are insulating materials.

Samples of plastic and wool are rubbed together. This causes a transfer of electrons.

Which row shows the direction of electron transfer and the final charge on both materials?

final charge final charge

plastic wool
on plastic on wool

A gains electrons loses electrons neutral positive

B gains electrons loses electrons negative positive
C loses electrons gains electrons negative positive
D loses electrons gains electrons positive neutral

31 Which circuit contains a heater and a fuse?

A B

C D

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 13

32 A light-dependent resistor (LDR) is to be used as an input sensor for an intruder alarm circuit.
When there is no light on the LDR, the lamp switches on.

The resistance of the fixed resistor is less than that of the lamp.

Which diagram shows the circuit?

A B

C D

33 A potential difference of 4.0 V produces a current of 3.0 A in a resistor.

How much energy is transferred to thermal energy during 10 s?

A 12 J B 30 J C 40 J D 120 J

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 14

34 The diagram shows a generator.

rotation
of coil
coil

N X

What are X and Y?

X Y

A N pole split-ring commutator

B N pole slip rings
C S pole split-ring commutator
D S pole slip rings

35 The diagram shows a loudspeaker that is producing a sound.

magnet
N

S
loudspeaker coil of wire
cone N

A student writes four sentences about the loudspeaker.

1 There is a direct current in the coil of wire.

2 The current in the coil produces a changing magnetic field.
3 A force is produced on the coil of wire attached to the cone.
4 The cone spins around due to the force.

Which sentences are correct?

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 15

36 A step-down transformer changes 240 V a.c. to 12 V a.c. There are 600 turns on the primary coil.

How many turns are on the secondary coil?

A 20 B 30 C 600 D 12 000

37 Alpha particles are directed at a thin gold foil.

Only a very small proportion of the alpha particles are deflected through very large angles.

Which fact about the nuclei of the gold atoms is not a conclusion of this experiment?

A They are surrounded by mostly empty space.

B They are very small.
C They contain most of the mass of the atom.
D They contain protons and neutrons.

38 A radioactive source emitting only gamma radiation is placed in front of a radiation detector which
measures the count rate.

What must cause the count rate to increase?

A a thick sheet of lead placed between the source and the detector
B a strong magnetic field placed between the source and the detector
C the radioactive source moved closer to the detector
D the detector moved further away from the radioactive source

39 Nuclear fusion is one source of energy.

What is nuclear fusion?

A the decay of a radioactive nucleus

B the joining together of two nuclei to make a larger nucleus
C the melting of an unstable nucleus
D the splitting of a nucleus into two lighter nuclei

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24 [Turn over

 16

40 Which statement is correct?

A The orbital speed of the Earth around the Sun is:

2  average diameter of the orbit

.
orbital period

B The orbit of the Earth around the Sun is an ellipse.

C The Moon takes approximately one month to orbit the Sun.
D Light from the Sun takes 5.0 minutes to reach the Earth.

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2024 5054/11/M/J/24

 Cambridge O Level

PHYSICS 5054/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2024
1 hour

You must answer on the multiple choice answer sheet.

*4111481595*

You will need: Multiple choice answer sheet

Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)

INSTRUCTIONS
 There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
 For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct
and record your choice in soft pencil on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Follow the instructions on the multiple choice answer sheet.
 Write in soft pencil.
 Write your name, centre number and candidate number on the multiple choice answer sheet in the
spaces provided unless this has been done for you.
 Do not use correction fluid.
 Do not write on any bar codes.
 You may use a calculator.
 Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
 The total mark for this paper is 40.
 Each correct answer will score one mark.
 Any rough working should be done on this question paper.

This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

IB24 06_5054_12/4RP
© UCLES 2024 [Turn over
 2

1 What is measured using a micrometer?

A area
B current
C length
D mass

2 Two people pull on ropes to move a boat along a canal.

canal boat

The boat moves at a constant velocity.

The vector diagram for the tension in the ropes is shown.

Which vector is the drag acting on the boat?

A B C D

3 The graph shows how the speed of a car travelling in a straight line changes with time.

Which section shows the largest acceleration?

C
speed B

A D

0
0 time

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 3

4 A man walks along a path from X to Y. The diagram shows the path from above.

X Y

The man measures the distance he walks and the time taken.

Which quantity can be calculated using this data only?

A acceleration
B average speed
C average velocity
D power

5 Which property of an object determines its resistance to a change from its state of rest or motion?

A its mass
B its shape
C its surface area
D its volume

6 The diagram shows a moon buggy used by astronauts.

moon buggy

The mass of the moon buggy on the Earth is 210 kg. The gravitational field strength on the Moon
is 16 of that on the Earth.

What is the weight of the moon buggy on the Moon?

A zero B 35 N C 210 N D 340 N

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 4

7 A car travels along a road. The force on the car due to the engine is 800 N.

The motion of the car depends on the value of the total resistive force R.

R 800 N

Which row shows the motion of the car for the given value of R?

value of resistive
motion
force R / N

A 500 deceleration
B 800 acceleration
C 900 deceleration
D 1000 acceleration

8 Four of the gravitational forces that act between objects in the Solar System are listed.

P the force on the Moon due to the Earth

Q the force on the Earth due to the Sun
R the force on the Earth due to the Moon
S the force on the Moon due to the Sun

Which two forces are a Newton’s third law pair?

A P and Q B P and R C Q and S D R and S

9 A box is moved up a rough slope from X to Y.

The diagram shows four forces acting on the box.

Which force is the force due to friction on the box?

D Y
A

C
B
X

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 5

10 The graph shows how the extension of four different threads depends on the load attached.

Which thread is the most difficult to stretch over the range of loads shown?

A
extension B
C

0
0 load

11 A satellite orbits a planet in a circular path as shown. It has constant speed.

There is a force on the satellite due to the planet.

In which direction is the force on the satellite when it is in the position shown?

A satellite NOT TO
planet B SCALE

direction of
D movement
C

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 6

12 A crane has a 5800 N counterweight positioned 2.3 m from the tower along a horizontal jib.

The centre of gravity P of the crane jib is marked.

jib

counterweight
P
2.3 m

5800 N

2300 N

What is the horizontal distance between the 2300 N load and P so that there is no moment
about P?

A 0.91 m B 3.5 m C 5.8 m D 8.1 m

13 A car of mass 750 kg travels 400 m at 25 m / s. It then accelerates to 35 m / s and travels a further
400 m.

What is the change in the momentum of the car due to acceleration?

A 7500 kg m / s
B 24 000 kg m / s
C 45 000 kg m / s
D 75 000 kg m / s

14 A ball is dropped from rest at the top of a building. Air resistance is negligible.

The velocity of the ball is 14 m / s when it hits the ground.

What is the height of the building?

A 2.9 m B 10 m C 20 m D 40 m

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 7

15 Which energy source is available constantly over a 24-hour period?

A natural gas
B solar cells
C tidal
D wind

16 A 15 W lamp is turned on for 30 minutes. It wastes 7000 J of energy.

What is the efficiency of the lamp?

A 0.26 B 0.35 C 0.59 D 0.74

17 Which quantity is not measured in joules (J)?

A gravitational potential energy

B latent heat
C power
D work

18 Which description of a liquid is correct?

A fixed shape, fixed volume

B fixed shape, variable volume
C variable shape, fixed volume
D variable shape, variable volume

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 8

19 A transparent box has a dividing wall in its middle. It contains two different gases, one in each
half, as shown.

dividing wall

brown gas colourless gas

The dividing wall is removed. The box is left for a long time. The gases do not react.

What is then seen in the box?

A brown gas on the right and colourless gas on the left

B pale brown gas throughout
C several distinct clouds of colourless and brown gas throughout
D colourless gas on the right and brown gas on the left

20 A bottle containing a cold liquid is placed on a table on a warm day. Drops of water form on the
outside of the bottle.

Which process causes the drops to form?

A condensation
B conduction
C convection
D evaporation

21 What is the specific heat capacity of a liquid?

A the difference between the boiling temperature and the melting temperature of the liquid
B the energy required to change the state of 1 kg of the liquid

C the energy required to heat 1 kg of the liquid through 1 C

D the increase in temperature of the liquid when it is heated

22 Which statement about infrared radiation is correct?

A In a vacuum, infrared radiation travels at the speed of light.

B Infrared radiation is a longitudinal wave.
C Infrared radiation has a higher frequency than ultraviolet radiation.
D White surfaces are better emitters of infrared radiation than black surfaces.

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 9

23 The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.

Which sound is classed as ultrasound?

A a sound with a wavelength of 250 cm

B a sound with a wavelength of 25 cm
C a sound with a wavelength of 2.5 cm
D none of the above

24 Which diagram shows how light from a distant object forms an image in a normal eye?

A B

C D

25 The colour of visible light is related to the wavelength of the light.

Which list of colours is in order of increasing wavelength?

A blue  green  yellow  red

B blue  green  red  yellow

C green  red  yellow  blue

D red  yellow  green  blue

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 10

26 A thin converging lens is used as a magnifying glass.

Which row gives the nature of the image produced and an expression that is the linear
magnification?

expression for
nature of image
linear magnification
image length
A real
object length

object length
B real
image length

image length
C virtual
object length

object length
D virtual
image length

27 Which application is not a use for ultrasound?

A cleaning jewellery
B scanning an unborn baby
C sonar
D sterilising water

28 Which equation is correct for potential difference (p.d.)?

A p.d. = voltage  current

energy
B p.d. =
time

C p.d. = work done

charge

current
D p.d. =
resistance

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 11

29 The diagrams show five electrical circuits. All of the resistors shown are identical.

1 2 3 4 5

Which circuits have equal resistance?

A 1, 2, 3 and 5
B 1, 2, 4 and 5
C 1, 3, 4 and 5
D 2, 3, 4 and 5

30 Which electrical appliance uses the heating effect of electricity?

A a cell phone (mobile phone)

B a fan
C a hairdryer
D a lawnmower

31 How many kilowatt-hours of energy are used by a 1000 W heater connected to a 230 V supply for
30 minutes?

A 0.30 kW h B 0.50 kW h C 30 kW h D 120 kW h

32 Which safety precautions must be taken when wiring an electrical kettle that has a stainless-steel
outer casing?

A It must be earthed and have a fuse in the live wire.

B It must be earthed and have a fuse in the neutral wire.
C It needs a fuse in the live wire but does not need to be earthed.
D It needs a fuse in the neutral wire but does not need to be earthed.

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 12

33 What is the purpose of the earth wire in a plug connected to an appliance?

A to complete the circuit so that the appliance works

B to conduct thermal energy so that the appliance does not get too hot
C to prevent a person getting a shock
D to protect the appliance from a current that is too large

34 The diagram shows a wire carrying a current in a magnetic field.

current

magnetic
field

What is the direction of the force on the wire?

A left to right
B right to left
C into the page
D out of the page

35 The diagram shows a simple d.c. motor.

What is the part labelled Q?

A a coil
B a magnet
C a slip ring
D a split-ring commutator

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 13

36 The diagram shows a transformer.

soft iron core

primary coil secondary coil

A student writes four statements about how the transformer works.

1 An alternating voltage across the primary coil induces an unchanging voltage across
the secondary coil.
2 An alternating voltage across the primary coil produces a changing magnetic field in
the iron core.
3 A changing magnetic field in the iron core induces an alternating voltage across the
secondary coil.
4 An unchanging voltage across the primary coil produces a changing magnetic field
across the secondary coil.

Which statements explain how the transformer works?

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 3 D 3 and 4

37 Which particle has the smallest mass?

A alpha particle
B electron
C neutron
D proton

38 Which two atoms are isotopes of the same element?

number of number of
atom
neutrons protons

1 22 12
2 22 14
3 25 13
4 24 14

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 4 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24 [Turn over

 14

39 Four types of ionising radiation are listed.

● alpha particles
● beta particles
● X-rays
● gamma rays

Which types of radiation can be emitted from the unstable nuclei of a radioactive material?

A alpha particles, beta particles and gamma rays

B alpha particles and beta particles only
C gamma rays only
D X-rays and gamma rays

40 What is the nuclear reaction that powers the Sun?

A the fission of hydrogen into helium

B the fission of helium into hydrogen
C the fusion of hydrogen into helium
D the fusion of helium into hydrogen

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 15

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2024 5054/12/M/J/24

 Cambridge O Level
* 6 5 5 9 1 7 7 2 6 1 *

PHYSICS 5054/21
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2024

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (LK/FC) 336606/4
© UCLES 2024 [Turn over
 2

1 A ball is released from rest at point A and moves along a smooth track ABCDE as shown in
Fig. 1.1. The ball is shown at point A and as it passes point B.

The ball is always in contact with the track and air resistance is negligible.

ball
A

D E

Fig. 1.1

Fig. 1.2 shows the distance−time graph for the ball as it moves from A to E.

distance / m

0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5
time / s

Fig. 1.2

(a) (i) On Fig. 1.2, mark:

• with the letter P one point where the ball accelerates

• with the letter Q one point where the ball has constant speed.
[2]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 3

(ii) Determine the speed of the ball at point X on Fig. 1.2.

Show your working.

speed = ................................................. m / s [3]

(b) The speeds of the ball at A, B, C and D are vA, vB, vC and vD respectively.

Arrange these four speeds from slowest to fastest.

slowest fastest

[1]

(c) Work is done to transfer energy between energy stores as the ball moves from A to B.

Name the force involved in the work done and describe the energy transfer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(d) The track at point B is circular in shape.

On Fig. 1.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of the resultant force on the ball at point B.
[1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24 [Turn over

 4

2 A small aircraft takes off from the horizontal deck of a ship.

Before taking off, the aircraft is held in place by a holdback bar.

When the holdback bar is released, the aircraft is pulled along the deck by a steam-powered
piston as shown in Fig. 2.1.

aircraft

cable for piston to

pull aircraft
deck of ship
holdback bar

piston pipe open to

atmosphere

tank containing
steam and
boiling water

Fig. 2.1 (not to scale)

The steam exerts a high pressure on the piston.

(a) (i) Explain, using ideas about particles, how the steam creates a pressure on the piston.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain why the pressure on the piston increases as the temperature of the steam
increases.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 5

(b) When the pressure is high enough, the holdback bar is released. The steam pushes the
piston along the pipe shown in Fig. 2.1.

The piston has a cross-sectional area of 0.30 m2.

The pressure of the steam in the tank is 2.1 × 106 Pa.

Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa.

Determine the resultant force on the piston caused by the pressure difference.

Show your working.

force = ..................................................... N [2]

(c) The force calculated in (b) causes the aircraft to accelerate to a maximum speed of 28 m / s
from rest.

The mass of the aircraft is 3.0 × 10 4 kg.

(i) Calculate the momentum of the aircraft at the maximum speed.

momentum = ............................................. kg m / s [2]

(ii) Calculate the time taken for the aircraft to reach the maximum speed.

time = ...................................................... s [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24 [Turn over

 6

3 A pan containing ice at –15 °C is placed on a gas heater as shown in Fig. 3.1.

Fig. 3.1

(a) Thermal conduction occurs in the metal from which the pan is made.

By referring to particles, describe the process of thermal conduction in a metal.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Fig. 3.2 shows how the temperature of the contents of the pan varies with time.

15

10
temperature / °C
5

–5

–10

–15
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
time / minutes

Fig. 3.2

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 7

(i) State the melting temperature of ice in kelvin.

melting temperature = ...................................................... K [1]

(ii) Explain why the temperature of the water is constant as the ice melts.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) The initial mass of ice in the pan is 1.5 kg and the initial temperature is –15 °C.

The specific heat capacity of ice is 2100 J / (kg °C).

Calculate the energy required to warm the ice to its melting temperature.

energy = ...................................................... J [2]

(iv) All the energy transferred to the pan comes from the heater.

Using your answer to (iii) and Fig. 3.2, determine the power of the heater used to warm
the ice.

power = ..................................................... W [2]

(v) The graph in Fig. 3.2 has a smaller gradient when the water is liquid than when it is solid.

Suggest one reason why.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24 [Turn over

 8

4 (a) Ultrasound of frequency 30 kHz has a wavelength of 0.011 m in air.

(i) State what is meant by ‘frequency’.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the speed of ultrasound in air.

Show your working.

speed = ................................................. m / s [2]

(iii) State one use of ultrasound.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Sound waves are longitudinal waves. Water waves are transverse waves.

(i) Describe, by referring to the movement of the particles in the wave, the difference
between a longitudinal wave and a transverse wave.

You may include a labelled diagram to help your description.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 9

(ii) State one source of waves that generates both longitudinal and transverse waves.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Fig. 4.1 shows radio waves of long and short wavelength passing over the same hill.

hill hill

diagram A diagram B

Fig. 4.1 (not to scale)

Explain why the radio waves in diagram A reach the house but the radio waves in diagram B
do not reach the house.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24 [Turn over

 10

5 Fig. 5.1 shows part of a circuit containing a 240 V mains supply connected to a lamp and two
heaters of resistance 40 Ω and 60 Ω.

240 V
a.c. mains 40 Ω 60 Ω
supply

Fig. 5.1

(a) Complete Fig. 5.1 by drawing the symbol for a fuse in the gap in the circuit. [1]

(b) (i) On Fig. 5.2 sketch a current−voltage graph for a filament lamp.

current

0
0 voltage

Fig. 5.2
[1]

(ii) Explain the shape of the current−voltage graph drawn in (i).

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Calculate the current at point P in the circuit shown in Fig. 5.1.

current = ...................................................... A [3]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 11

(d) The current in the lamp is 1.5 A.

(i) Suggest a suitable fuse rating for the fuse.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why a fuse rating much larger than the value in (i) is not suitable.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Explain why it is necessary to connect a fuse in the live wire rather than the neutral wire
or earth wire.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24 [Turn over

 12

6 Fig. 6.1 shows the structure of a simple electric motor.

rotation
magnet

S
commutator
N carbon brush

coil

battery

Fig. 6.1

The current in the coil causes the coil to rotate.

A student notices that the coil turns in the direction shown by the curved arrow in Fig. 6.1.

(a) (i) State what happens to the motor if a stronger magnet is used.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) On Fig. 6.1 mark and label:

• the direction of the current in the coil

• the direction of the magnetic field.
[1]

(iii) Explain why the coil turns.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 13

(b) Two vertical wires carry equal currents in opposite directions. They pass at right angles
through a piece of card as shown in Fig. 6.2.

current current
downwards upwards
card

Fig. 6.2

Fig. 6.3 is a view of the card from above.

key
current upwards
out of card
current downwards
into card

Fig. 6.3

(i) On Fig. 6.3 sketch the pattern of the magnetic field produced.

Indicate the direction of the magnetic field on the pattern that you draw.
[3]

(ii) The currents in the two wires cause the wires to repel each other.

Explain how the current in one wire causes a force on the other wire.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24 [Turn over

 14

7 (a) Table 7.1 shows four different nuclei.

Table 7.1

thorium-236 protactinium-236 uranium-235 uranium-238

236Th 236Pa 235U 238U

90 91 92 92

(i) State which two nuclei have the same number of protons.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State which two nuclei have the same number of neutrons.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) State which two nuclei have the same number of nucleons.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) A teacher uses a Geiger-Müller tube and a counter to measure the background radiation in
the laboratory.

The counter records 20 counts per minute.

A radioactive source is then placed in front of the tube and the counter records 420 counts
per minute.

(i) State what is meant by ‘background radiation’.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The measured count rate of 420 counts per minute can be corrected for background
radiation.

Calculate the corrected count rate from the source.

count rate = ........................... counts per minute [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 15

(iii) The radioactive source has a half-life of 45 minutes.

Determine the reading on the counter 90 minutes later.

reading on counter = ........................... counts per minute [2]

(iv) Suggest why your answer to (iii) is only an estimate.

...........................................................................................................................................

.......................................................................................................................................[1]

(c) Fig. 7.1 shows different uses of three different types of radiation.

Draw a line on Fig. 7.1 from each use of radiation to the type of radiation used. One line has
been drawn for you.

Each type of radiation can be used once, more than once or not at all.

use of radiation type of radiation

household fire
(smoke) alarm
a-particle
irradiating food
to kill bacteria
b-particle
sterilisation of
equipment
c-radiation
measuring
paper thickness

Fig. 7.1
[2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24 [Turn over

 16

8 Table 8.1 shows data about three planets, Mercury, Venus and Earth.

Table 8.1

time for average gravitational field

distance from density
one orbit of strength at surface
Sun / km
Sun / days kg / m3 N / kg
Mercury 88 5.8 × 107 5400 3.7
Venus 220 1.1 × 108 5200 8.9
Earth 365 1.5 × 108 5500 9.8

(a) Fig. 8.1 shows these planets in alignment with the Sun. They rotate around the Sun in the
direction shown.

Mark and label on Fig. 8.1 the positions of the three planets 110 days after the position shown
in Fig. 8.1.

Sun Mercury Venus Earth

Fig. 8.1 (not to scale)

[3]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 17

(b) (i) Each of the three planets has a similar average density.

Suggest why the gravitational field strength at the surface of Mercury is much smaller
than at the surface of Venus.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) An object has a weight of 37 N on the surface of Mercury.

Calculate its weight on the surface of the Earth. Show your working.

weight = ..................................................... N [2]

(c) State what is meant by a ‘moon’.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) The Sun will eventually run out of hydrogen.

Describe what happens to the Sun when the hydrogen runs out.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 18

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 19

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2024 5054/21/M/J/24

 Cambridge O Level
* 2 7 3 0 7 9 9 4 9 0 *

PHYSICS 5054/41
Paper 4 Alternative to Practical May/June 2024

1 hour

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 40.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (PB/SG) 331485/3
© UCLES 2024 [Turn over
 2

1 A student finds the volume of a small glass ball (marble) by two different methods.

(a) method 1

The student:

• places six small glass balls by the side of a metre rule as shown in Fig. 1.1
• makes sure that there are no gaps between the balls.

metre rule

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A B

Fig. 1.1

(i) Take readings on the metre rule of the positions of points A and B shown in Fig. 1.1.

Give your readings to the nearest 0.1 cm.

position of point A = .......................................................... cm

position of point B = .......................................................... cm

[1]

(ii) The length l on Fig. 1.1 is the distance between points A and B.
The average diameter d of one ball can be found using the equation:

l = 6d

Use your answers to (a)(i) to calculate the length l and diameter d. Give your answers to
the nearest 0.1 cm.

l = .......................................................... cm

d = .......................................................... cm
[2]

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24

 3

(iii) The average volume V of one glass ball using this method, is given by the equation:

3.14d 3
V= 6
Calculate V.

V = .................................................. cm3 [1]

(b) method 2

• The student pours water into a measuring cylinder.

(i) The volume of water in the measuring cylinder V1 is shown in Fig. 1.2.

cm3
50

40 30

30
20
20

10

Fig. 1.2

Write down the reading V1.

V1 = .................................................. cm3 [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24 [Turn over

 4

(ii) • The six glass balls are carefully added to the water in the measuring cylinder.

The new reading on the measuring cylinder V2 is shown in Fig. 1.3.

40

30

Fig. 1.3

The volume VT of the six balls is given by

VT = V2 – V1.

Calculate VT . Show your working.

VT = .................................................. cm3 [1]

(iii) Calculate the average volume V of one ball using this method. Give your answer to the
nearest 0.1 cm3.

V = .................................................. cm3 [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24

 5

(c) Suggest whether method 1 or method 2 gives the more accurate value for the volume of the
ball.

Explain your answer.

method giving more accurate value ..........................................................................................

explanation ...............................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[1]

(d) The student now uses the six glass balls to find the average mass of one glass ball using a
small beaker and a top pan (electronic) balance.

Describe the method the student uses.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24 [Turn over

 6

2 A student investigates how the temperature of the surroundings affects the rate of cooling of water.

(a) (i) The student:

• pours 100 cm3 of hot water into a 250 cm3 beaker

• uses a thermometer to take the temperature of the water at time t = 0 s.

The thermometer reading at time t = 0 s is shown in Fig. 2.1.

°C
80

70

60

Fig. 2.1

Record the temperature of the water at time t = 0 s in Table 2.1.

Table 2.1

t/s θ / °C
0
...................
30 69

60 67

90 66

120 65

150 64

180 63

210 62

240 61
[1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24

 7

(ii) The student then records the temperature θ of the water every 30 s for 240 s. The results
are recorded in Table 2.1.

Before taking each temperature reading, the student carefully stirs the water in the
beaker. Explain why.

....................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Calculate the average cooling rate C1 of the water for the first 90 s of the experiment.
Use the readings in Table 2.1 and the equation:

θ0 – θ90
C1 =
t
where θ0 is the temperature of the water at 0 s, θ90 is the temperature at 90 s and t is the
time of 90 s.

Give the unit for C1.

C1 = .................................. unit ............... [2]

(iv) Calculate the average cooling rate C2 of the water for the final 90 s of the experiment.
Use the equation:

θ150 – θ240
C2 =
t
where θ150 is the temperature of the water at 150 s, θ240 is the temperature of the water
at 240 s and t is the time of 90 s.

C2 = .................................. unit ............... [1]

(v) Compare your values of C1 and C2. Explain any difference in these values.

...........................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24 [Turn over

 8

(b) The student repeats the procedure described in (a)(i) but this time he places the 250 cm3
beaker inside a larger beaker containing iced water. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 2.2.

thermometer

250 cm3 500 cm3

beaker beaker

iced water hot water

Fig. 2.2

The student reads the temperature θ of the hot water, records the reading and immediately
starts the stop-watch.

Table 2.2. shows the temperature θ at times t = 0 s, 30 s, 60 s, and 90 s.

Table 2.2

t/s θ / °C
0 75
30 68
60 62
90 57

(i) Calculate the average cooling rate of the hot water for the 90 s. Use the readings in
Table 2.2 and the equation:

θ0 – θ90
C3 =
t

C3 = .................................. unit ............... [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24

 9

(ii) Describe how C3 differs from C1. Explain your answer.

...........................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(iii) The recorded readings show that this experiment is not a valid comparison of C1 and C3.

By referring to the results recorded in Table 2.1 and Table 2.2, explain why this is not a
valid comparison.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) State one other variable that should be kept constant to make a valid comparison.

...........................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24 [Turn over

 10

3 A student measures the focal length of a lens.

Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus she uses and the position of the lens when a clearly focused image
is formed on the screen.

illuminated object
screen
lamp
convex lens in holder

x y
D

Fig. 3.1 (one fifth full size)

The student:

• places the screen a distance D = 60.0 cm from the illuminated object

• places the lens between the object and the screen so that the lens is very close to the
illuminated object
• moves the lens slowly away from the illuminated object until a clearly focused image is formed
on the screen.

(a) (i) Measure and record distance x on Fig. 3.1.

x = .................................................... cm [1]

(ii) Fig. 3.1 is drawn to a scale of one fifth full size.

Use your answer to (a)(i) to calculate the actual object distance u from the lens.

u = .................................................... cm [1]

(iii) Deduce the image distance v, the distance from the lens to the screen when a clear
image is seen.

v = .................................................... cm [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24

 11

(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the shape of the illuminated object and Fig. 3.3 shows the image seen on the
screen.

Fig. 3.2 Fig. 3.3

Describe two differences between the illuminated object and its image on the screen.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) (i) The student moves the screen away from the illuminated object and repeats the
procedure for values of D = 70.0 cm, 80.0 cm, 90.0 cm and 100.0 cm.

Table 3.1 shows the values recorded.

Add your values for u and v from (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) to Table 3.1 on page 12.

Complete Table 3.1 by calculating the value of (u × v) for each value of D.

Give your answers to 3 significant figures.

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24 [Turn over

 12

Table 3.1

D / cm u / cm v / cm (u × v) / cm2
60.0
70.0 21.0 49.0
80.0 19.5 60.5
90.0 18.6 71.4
100.0 17.8 82.2
[2]

(ii) Use the grid provided in Fig. 3.4 on page 13 to plot a graph of (u × v) / cm2 on the y-axis
against D / cm on the x-axis.

You do not need to start your axes at the origin (0,0).

Draw the straight line of best fit. [4]

(iii) The focal length f of the lens is numerically equal to the gradient of the line.

Calculate the gradient of the line. Show all working and indicate on your graph in Fig. 3.4
the values you use.

f = .................................................... cm [2]

(d) The lens manufacturer states that the focal length of the lens is 15.0 cm ± 10%.

Decide, with a calculation, whether your value of f agrees with this statement and tick the box
that shows your answer.

calculation:

My value for f agrees with the manufacturer’s statement.

My value for f does not agree with the manufacturer’s statement.

[1]

[Total: 14]
© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24
 13

Fig. 3.4
© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24 [Turn over
 14

4 Plan an experiment to investigate how the thickness of a metal wire affects its resistance.

The resistance of a wire can be found using the equation:

potential difference (p.d.) across wire

resistance of wire =
current in the wire
The following apparatus is available:

• six lengths of metal wire, each of different thickness

• an ammeter
• a voltmeter
• a power supply
• several connecting leads
• a micrometer.

Other apparatus normally available in a school laboratory can also be used.

In your plan, you should:

• draw a circuit diagram to show how you will use the apparatus
• explain briefly how to carry out the investigation
• state the key variables to keep constant
• draw a table, with column headings, to show how to display readings (you are not required to
enter any readings in the table)
• explain how to use these readings to reach a conclusion.

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24
 15

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

..........................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................................................... [6]
© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24
 16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2024 5054/41/M/J/24

 Cambridge O Level
* 8 9 6 3 5 5 5 6 4 4 *

PHYSICS 5054/22
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2024

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 16 pages.

DC (DE/SW) 336607/4
© UCLES 2024 [Turn over
 2

1 Fig. 1.1 shows two trolleys. On the front of trolley A, there is a wooden rod. Trolley B is initially at
rest.

As trolley A moves towards the right, the rod enters the modelling clay. Trolley A slows down and
trolley B starts moving.

The trolleys then stick together and continue moving towards the right.

wooden modelling
rod clay
trolley A trolley B

Fig. 1.1

Fig. 1.2 shows the speed−time graph for the two trolleys.

0.8
speed
m / s 0.6 trolley A

trolley A and B
0.4

0.2 trolley B

0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
t/s

Fig. 1.2

The trolleys start to collide at time t = 0.30 s. At t = 0.50 s, the trolleys are moving at the same
speed.

(a) (i) State how Fig. 1.2 shows that, during the collision, trolley B has a uniform acceleration.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Describe how the graph in Fig. 1.2 shows that the magnitude (size) of the acceleration of
trolley B is larger than the magnitude of the deceleration of trolley A.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24

 3

(iii) Calculate the acceleration of trolley B when t = 0.40 s.

acceleration = ................................................ m / s2 [2]

(b) The mass of trolley A = 0.80 kg. The mass of trolley B = 0.60 kg.

Show that momentum is conserved in the collision.

[2]

(c) In another collision between the same trolleys, the rod and modelling clay are not present.
Trolley A hits trolley B with the same initial speed.

Explain why the force between the trolleys is larger in this collision.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24 [Turn over

 4

2 Fig. 2.1 shows a small swimming pool containing water.

4.0 m
2.1 m

Fig. 2.1

The depth of water in the pool is 0.80 m. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.

(a) (i) Show that the mass of water in the pool is approximately 6700 kg.

[2]

(ii) Define ‘pressure’.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Calculate the pressure on the base of the pool due to the water.

pressure = .................................................... Pa [2]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24

 5

(iv) The water in the pool is initially at a temperature of 10 °C.

The temperature rises when 5.1 × 108 J of energy is transferred to the water.

The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).

Calculate the final temperature of the water.

temperature = ..................................................... °C [3]

(b) (i) Explain, in terms of the movement of particles, how evaporation causes cooling.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Changes to factors in the environment of the swimming pool can cause an increase or
decrease in the amount of evaporation from the surface of the water.

State two changes to environmental factors that increase the amount of evaporation
from the surface of the water.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................
[1]

[Total: 11]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24 [Turn over

 6

3 Fig. 3.1 shows a solar-powered charger connected to a cell phone (mobile phone).

cell phone
solar-powered
charger

Fig. 3.1

The battery inside the cell phone is charged by the solar-powered charger.

(a) (i) Complete Fig. 3.2 to show the useful transfer of energy from the Sun to the battery.

...................... electric field ...........................

energy in Sun in charger energy in battery
light from electrical
Sun current

Fig. 3.2
[2]

(ii) Explain why the battery takes a long time to charge on a cloudy day.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) After use, the outside surface of the cell phone is warm. When switched off, the cell phone
cools down.

Name and describe the three processes by which thermal energy is transferred as the cell
phone cools down.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

3 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24

 7

(c) It takes 4.5 hours to charge the battery with an average current of 300 mA.

Calculate the quantity of charge that enters the battery. Give the unit of your answer.

charge = ................................... unit .............. [3]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24 [Turn over

 8

4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows light passing through a triangular glass prism.

Q R

Fig. 4.1

(i) State the value of the angle of incidence at point P.

angle of incidence = ....................................................... ° [1]

(ii) Draw the normal and the angle of incidence at point R.

Label the angle of incidence. [2]

(iii) State two conditions needed so that no light refracts from the glass into the air at point Q.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) Information is sent across the internet using pulses of visible light through long, thin glass
fibres and electrical signals through copper wires.

(i) State the name of one other type of electromagnetic radiation used to transmit information
through long, thin glass fibres.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest two advantages of using glass fibres rather than copper wires to transmit
information from the internet.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24

 9

5 An initially uncharged rubber balloon is rubbed with a woollen cloth as shown in Fig. 5.1.

Rubbing the balloon causes the balloon to have a negative charge.

balloon gains

................................

and now has a negative charge

woollen cloth loses

................................
and now has a
......................... charge

Fig. 5.1

(a) (i) On Fig. 5.1, complete the labels on the diagram. [2]

(ii) Explain why the balloon stays negatively charged for a long time.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Rubbing the balloon causes the temperature of the air inside it to rise.

Explain, in terms of the particles of air, why the volume of the balloon increases when the
temperature of the air rises.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24 [Turn over

 10

6 Fig. 6.1 shows a circuit diagram containing a battery, a light-dependent resistor (LDR) and a fixed
resistor of resistance 240 Ω connected in series.

240 Ω LDR

Fig. 6.1

There is a lamp near the circuit. Light from the lamp is incident on the LDR when the lamp is
switched on.

Fig. 6.2 shows the current−voltage graph for the LDR with the lamp switched on and with the lamp
switched off.

with lamp
0.10
switched on
current / A
0.08

0.06 with lamp

switched off
0.04

0.02

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
voltage / V

Fig. 6.2

(a) State Ohm’s law.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Explain how the graph lines in Fig. 6.2 show that Ohm’s law applies to the LDR.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24

 11

(c) Use values from Fig. 6.2 to explain the effect of light on the resistance of the LDR.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(d) With the lamp switched on, the current in the LDR is 0.050 A.

(i) Determine the current in the fixed resistor.

current in fixed resistor = ...................................................... A [1]

(ii) Calculate the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cell.

e.m.f. = ...................................................... V [3]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24 [Turn over

 12

7 (a) A plotting compass contains a needle. The needle is a small magnet that can rotate about its
centre.

Fig. 7.1 shows the plotting compass placed close to a bar magnet.

needle compass
bar magnet

NS

Fig. 7.1 (not to scale)

(i) On Fig. 7.1 mark the magnetic poles on the bar magnet. [1]

(ii) There is a piece of paper underneath the magnet.

Describe how the compass is used to plot the magnetic field line that passes from one
pole to the other and through P.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iii) Describe how to use the compass in Fig. 7.1 to determine the direction of the magnetic
field at P.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24

 13

(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the apparatus a student uses to produce an alternating current (a.c.).

magnet coil

A
centre-zero
ammeter

Fig. 7.2

The magnet is moved into and out of the coil.

(i) Explain why a current is produced when the magnet moves.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Describe the movement of the magnet that produces an a.c. of frequency 0.50 Hz.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Describe how the centre-zero ammeter shows the current is a.c. rather than d.c. (direct
current).

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Explain why increasing the frequency of the a.c. produced also increases the magnitude
(size) of the a.c produced.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24 [Turn over

 14

8 Fig. 8.1 is a picture of a nebula formed from a supernova.

Fig. 8.1

(a) State what is meant by ‘a supernova’.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Describe how a protostar forms inside a nebula.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Our Sun is in a circular orbit around a black hole at the centre of our galaxy.

(i) State the name of the galaxy that contains our Sun.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State what is meant by a light-year.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The time taken for one complete orbit of our Sun around the black hole is 7.3 × 1015 s.

The distance from our Sun to the black hole is 26 000 light-years.

1 year = 3.2 × 107 s speed of light = 3.0 × 108 m / s

Calculate the speed of our Sun as it orbits the black hole.

Show your working and give your answer in m / s.

speed = .................................................. m / s [3]

[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24
 15

9 Alpha particles are sometimes emitted from the nuclei of radioactive elements.

This emission is both random and spontaneous.

(a) Describe what is meant by ‘spontaneous’ emission.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Describe the composition of an alpha particle.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Alpha particles are detected using the tracks shown in a cloud chamber or by the sparks
produced in a spark counter.

(i) Describe the structure of either a cloud chamber or a spark counter. Include a labelled
drawing of the apparatus.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Describe how the emission of alpha particles is shown as random in the apparatus you
described in (c)(i).

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24 [Turn over

 16

(iii) A radioactive source produces 120 tracks in one minute in a cloud chamber.

6.0 hours later, the same source produces 15 tracks in one minute.

Without the source present, no tracks are produced.

Calculate the half-life of the radioactive isotope in the source.

half-life = ............................................... hours [2]

[Total: 9]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2024 5054/22/M/J/24

 Cambridge O Level
* 6 9 1 8 1 9 3 7 8 6 *

PHYSICS 5054/21
Paper 2 Theory October/November 2023

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (CJ/SG) 318789/4
© UCLES 2023 [Turn over
 2

1 Fig. 1.1 shows a toy water rocket.

rocket
air

water

air pump

rubber
tubing

Fig. 1.1

The rocket is half-filled with water and connected by rubber tubing to a pump.

(a) Air is then pumped into the rocket so that the pressure of the air inside the rocket increases.

(i) Explain, in terms of particles, why the air in the rocket exerts a pressure on the walls of
the rocket.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) The temperature of the air in the rocket remains constant as air is pumped into the
rocket.

Explain why increasing the number of air particles in the rocket increases the pressure of
the air in the rocket.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23

 3

(b) When the air pressure in the rocket is high, the rubber tubing is removed from the rocket.

The water in the rocket is expelled downwards.

Explain, in terms of momentum, why the rocket begins to accelerate upwards.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) As the water is expelled from the rocket, the upward acceleration of the rocket changes.

Suggest two reasons for the change in the acceleration of the rocket.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23 [Turn over

 4

2 A lorry (truck) is at rest on a straight, horizontal road.

A constant driving force of 5.4 × 104 N acts on the lorry and it accelerates forwards.

(a) Define what is meant by ‘acceleration’.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) As the lorry moves forwards, work is done on it by the driving force.

(i) State the equation that defines work done.

Refer to the direction of the force exerted.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the work done on the lorry by the driving force when the lorry travels a distance
of 280 m.

work done = ...................................................... J [2]

(iii) At one point on the road, the kinetic energy of the lorry is 3.2 × 106 J and its speed is
12 m / s.

Calculate the mass of the lorry.

mass = .................................................... kg [3]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23

 5

3 When the temperature of a liquid increases, the kinetic energy of its particles increases and the
liquid expands.

(a) Explain, by referring to particles, why a liquid expands when heated.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The heater in a kettle is near to the base of the kettle. The kettle is filled with water at a
temperature of 17 °C and the heater is switched on.

(i) State the name of the method of thermal energy transfer that causes energy to be
transferred to the water that is touching the heater.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain how thermal energy is transferred through all of the water in the kettle.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iii) State the boiling temperature of water at standard atmospheric pressure. Include the unit
in your answer.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) The kettle contains 2.5 kg of water at standard atmospheric pressure.

The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).

When the water reaches its boiling temperature, the kettle switches off.

Calculate the increase in the internal energy of the water.

increase in internal energy = ...................................................... J [3]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23 [Turn over

 6

4 Red light of frequency 4.7 × 1014 Hz travels in air at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s.

(a) Calculate the wavelength in air of this red light.

wavelength = ..................................................... m [3]

(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a narrow beam of this red light striking the surface of a parallel-sided glass
block.

red light
45°

glass block

30°

Fig. 4.1

(i) State what happens to the speed, to the frequency and to the wavelength of the light as
it enters the block.

speed ................................................................................................................................

frequency ..........................................................................................................................

wavelength ........................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Using the angles shown on Fig. 4.1, calculate the refractive index of the glass.

refractive index = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23

 7

(iii) The light continues along the path shown in Fig. 4.1 until it strikes the bottom surface of
the block. Light then emerges into the air.

Draw on Fig. 4.1 to show the path taken by the light until it strikes the bottom surface and
the path of the light that emerges into the air. [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23 [Turn over

 8

5 Most of the energy emitted by the Sun is in three regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.

(a) The name of one of these three regions is the ultraviolet region.

(i) State the names of all three regions in order of increasing frequency.

smallest frequency ............................................................................................................

intermediate frequency ......................................................................................................

largest frequency ...............................................................................................................

[2]

(ii) Some of the ultraviolet radiation emitted by the Sun reaches the surface of the Earth.

Give one possible damaging effect of ultraviolet radiation on the human body and the
property of ultraviolet radiation that causes this damage.

damaging effect .................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

property .............................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) Electromagnetic radiation is a transverse wave.

Describe the difference between a transverse wave and a longitudinal wave.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23

 9

6 Fig. 6.1 shows a circuit that contains two identical cells, each of e.m.f. 1.5 V, that are connected in
parallel.

The circuit also contains two ammeters, a thermistor T and two resistors R and S.

ammeter 1 ammeter 2
A A

R S T

Fig. 6.1

The reading on ammeter 1 is 0.20 A.

(a) State why the reading on ammeter 2 is also 0.20 A.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The resistance of R is 1.5 Ω and the resistance of S is 3.5 Ω.

(i) Calculate the resistance of T.

resistance = ..................................................... Ω [3]

(ii) The temperature of T increases.

Explain why the potential difference (p.d.) across T decreases.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23 [Turn over
 10

7 An alternating current (a.c.) generator is used in a remote location to supply electricity.

(a) Fig. 7.1 shows the structure of a simple a.c. generator with the coil horizontal.

output terminals

S
P
N rotation

horizontal coil

Fig. 7.1

(i) State the name of the components labelled P and Q on Fig. 7.1.

P ........................................................................................................................................

Q ........................................................................................................................................
[1]

(ii) When the generator is producing an electrical output, P is stationary and Q is rotating.

Explain the purpose of P and Q.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23

 11

(b) The output of the generator is connected to an oscilloscope.

On the oscilloscope the Y-gain is set at 5.0 V / cm and the timebase setting is 2.0 ms / cm.

Fig. 7.2 shows the trace on the screen of the oscilloscope.

trace

1 cm

1 cm

Fig. 7.2

(i) Write a letter X on the trace shown in Fig. 7.2 to indicate one point when the coil is
vertical. [1]

(ii) Using Fig. 7.2, determine the maximum value of the e.m.f. produced by the generator.

maximum e.m.f. = ...................................................... V [2]

(iii) Using Fig. 7.2, determine, in milliseconds, the time it takes for one revolution of the coil.

time for one revolution of the coil = ................................................... ms [1]

(iv) Determine the frequency of the output of the generator.

frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23 [Turn over

 12

235
8 Uranium-235 ( 92 U) is the isotope of uranium that is used as the fuel in a nuclear power station.
238
(a) The isotope of uranium that is most abundant in nature is uranium-238 ( 92 U).

State how a neutral atom of uranium-235 differs from a neutral atom of uranium-238.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) In the reactor of a nuclear power station, a nucleus of uranium-235 absorbs a slow-moving
neutron and undergoes fission.

(i) State what happens to the nucleus of an atom during fission.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain how fission can lead to a chain reaction in the reactor.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

(iii) State the purpose of the moderator in the reactor.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Explain the action of the control rods in the reactor.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23

 13

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23 [Turn over

 14

9 The planet Venus orbits the Sun at a constant speed of 3.5 × 104 m / s and takes a time TV to
complete one orbit.

(a) Venus is always 1.1 × 1011 m from the Sun.

Calculate TV.

TV = ...................................................... s [2]

(b) Explain why speed is a scalar quantity.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Velocity is a vector quantity.

(i) Explain what happens to the velocity of Venus as it orbits the Sun.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) There is a resultant force on Venus as it orbits the Sun. The force is perpendicular to the
direction of the motion of Venus.

State why this force is needed.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23

 15

(iii) Fig. 9.1 shows the orbit of Venus around the Sun.

On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the resultant force on Venus.

Sun Venus

Fig. 9.1
[1]

(iv) State what causes the force acting on Venus.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) One planet in the Solar System is closer to the Sun than Venus.

(i) State the name of this planet.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Compare the time that this planet takes to complete one orbit of the Sun with TV and
explain the difference.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 12]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23

 16

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/O/N/23

 Cambridge O Level
* 6 4 5 4 4 0 1 5 3 3 *

PHYSICS 5054/22
Paper 2 Theory October/November 2023

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of freefall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 16 pages.

DC (CE/JG) 318793/3
© UCLES 2023 [Turn over
 2

1 Velocity is a vector quantity but speed is a scalar quantity.

(a) State how a vector quantity differs from a scalar quantity.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Underline all the vector quantities in the list.

acceleration distance energy mass momentum temperature [1]

(c) Fig. 1.1 shows a passenger running across a large ship at right angles to the direction in
which the ship is moving.

2.4 m / s
due north

90°
due east
6.8 m / s

passenger ship

Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)

The passenger runs across the ship at 2.4 m / s due north.

The large ship is travelling due east at 6.8 m / s.

Determine, either graphically or by calculation, the resultant velocity of the passenger. Give
the direction in which the passenger is moving relative to due north.

Show how the answer is obtained.

velocity = ............................... m / s at .............. ° from due north [4]

[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23
 3

2 A spacecraft of mass 300 kg is moving in a straight line in space, at a speed of 8000 m / s.

(a) Calculate the momentum of the spacecraft.

momentum = ............................................. kg m / s [2]

(b) The fuel on the spacecraft explodes and the spacecraft splits into two parts. The direction in
which the parts move does not change.

(i) After the explosion, the speed of the front part increases to 9000 m / s. It has a mass of
150 kg.

Calculate the speed of the rear part after the explosion.

speed = ................................................. m / s [3]

(ii) The total kinetic energy of the two parts after the explosion is greater than the original
kinetic energy of the spacecraft.

State the energy transfer that occurs in the explosion.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The explosion lasts for 0.20 s.

Calculate the average force on the front part during this time.

force = ..................................................... N [3]

[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23 [Turn over
 4

3 A plane, irregular lamina has a mass of 50 g. It hangs from a nail that passes through a small hole
H near to the edge of the lamina.

The nail acts as a pivot and the lamina can swing about it. The lamina is held in the position
shown in Fig. 3.1, a small distance above a horizontal bench.

8.0 cm

6.0 cm

10 cm G
lamina

bench

Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)

The centre of gravity of the lamina is at G.

(a) The weight of the lamina is a force that acts downwards.

(i) Explain why the lamina experiences this downward force.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the weight of the lamina on Earth.

weight = ..................................................... N [2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23

 5

(b) The weight produces a moment about the pivot through H.

(i) Using Fig. 3.1, calculate the moment of the weight about the pivot.

moment = .................................................. N m [2]

(ii) The lamina is now released from the position shown in Fig. 3.1.

Describe what happens to the lamina from the time it is released until it stops moving.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23 [Turn over

 6

4 Fig. 4.1 shows a long vertical tube, sealed at the base and open at the other end.

The tube is 1.0 m long.

The cross-sectional area of the tube is 4.0 × 10–4 m2.

It is filled with a liquid of density 1.4 × 104 kg / m3.

tube

1.0 m

dense liquid

base of cross-sectional area 4.0 × 10–4 m2

bench

Fig. 4.1 (not to scale)

The atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa.

(a) Calculate:

(i) the total pressure in the liquid at the bottom of the tube

total pressure = .................................................... Pa [3]

(ii) the force exerted on the inside surface of the bottom of the tube.

force = ..................................................... N [2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23

 7

(b) A small sheet of glass is placed over the open end of the tube.

The tube is inverted in a container of the dense liquid.

The open end of the tube and the sheet of glass are a short distance below the surface of the
liquid.

Fig. 4.2 shows the arrangement.

inverted tube

container
dense liquid

sheet of glass

Fig. 4.2 (not to scale)

The sheet of glass seals the open end of the inverted tube.

(i) Describe what happens in the inverted tube when the sheet of glass is removed.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

Question 4 continues over the page.

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23 [Turn over

 8

(ii) This equipment is used to make a measurement that is used to calculate atmospheric
pressure.

Describe the measurement made and then used in the calculation of atmospheric
pressure.

You may draw a diagram to help your description.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 10]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23

 9

5 Fig. 5.1 shows a device that cools the air in a room by evaporation.

water in container

grille grille

fan
wet sponge block

Fig. 5.1

Water drips from the container into the sponge block and keeps it wet.

Air flows in through one grille and out through the other.

As the air flows through the wet sponge block, the water in the sponge block evaporates.

(a) When the water evaporates, the temperature of water remaining in the sponge block
decreases.

(i) Explain, in terms of the movement of particles, why this decrease in temperature occurs.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain why energy is needed when the water evaporates.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) State two ways in which evaporation differs from boiling.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23 [Turn over

 10

6 The loudspeaker shown in Fig. 6.1 produces a sound of frequency 800 Hz.

loudspeaker

power supply
sound of frequency 800 Hz

cone

Fig. 6.1

(a) State what is meant by ‘frequency’.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Explain whether the sound produced by the speaker is audible to a human with healthy
hearing.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) Describe the motion of the cone in Fig. 6.1 and explain how this causes the production of
sound.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(d) The Sun is a very large and extremely violent ball of gas. Electromagnetic radiation from
explosions on the surface of the Sun reaches the Earth.

Explain why sound from explosions on the surface of the Sun does not reach the Earth.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23

 11

7 An electric circuit contains a battery, a fixed resistor R, a voltmeter and a thermistor.

Fig. 7.1 is an incomplete circuit diagram of the arrangement.

T1 T2
V

Fig. 7.1

The thermistor is connected between terminals T1 and T2.

(a) Complete Fig. 7.1 by drawing the circuit symbol for a thermistor connected between T1 and
T 2. [1]

(b) The resistance of R is 2.5 Ω. The reading on the voltmeter is 0.40 V.

Calculate:

(i) the current in R

current = ...................................................... A [2]

(ii) the power transferred in R.

power = ..................................................... W [2]

(c) The temperature of the thermistor increases.

Explain what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23 [Turn over
 12

8 Fig. 8.1 shows a permanent magnet attached to one end of an unstretched spring and held at rest
just above a solenoid.

spring

N permanent
magnet

solenoid A

Fig. 8.1

The solenoid is connected to a sensitive ammeter.

(a) State the name of a substance from which permanent magnets are made.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The magnet is released and moves downwards towards the solenoid.

The ammeter shows that there is a current in the solenoid when the magnet moves.

(i) Explain why there is a current in the solenoid.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23

 13

(ii) The current causes the top end of the solenoid to become the S pole of an electromagnet.

The bottom end of the permanent magnet is an S pole.

Explain why the top end of the solenoid becomes an S pole as the magnet moves
downwards towards the solenoid.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) The magnet oscillates up and down.

Describe what happens to the current in the solenoid.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23 [Turn over

 14

9 In space, an interstellar cloud of dust and gas collapses to form a protostar. The cloud contains
hydrogen.

(a) Describe the energy transfers that take place as the cloud collapses and forms the protostar.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The collapse results in a nuclear reaction in the protostar that involves the isotope hydrogen-3
( 31 H).

The isotope hydrogen-3 ( 31 H) is radioactive. It decays by beta particle emission.

(i) State how the nuclei of isotopes of the same element are different.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why hydrogen-3 cannot decay by alpha particle emission.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Complete the equation for the decay of hydrogen-3 to an isotope of helium (He).
3 ..... .....
1H ..... β + ..... He
[2]

(iv) Explain how the nuclear reaction in the protostar stops further collapse as the protostar
becomes a stable star.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(c) The cloud of dust and gas that collapses also contains atoms of the heaviest elements.

State which part of the life cycle of a star is responsible for the production of the heaviest
elements.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23
 15

10 The isotope iodine-131 emits two types of nuclear radiation. Gamma radiation is one of the types
emitted.

A sample of iodine-131 produces a narrow beam of radiation which passes into a magnetic field.

Fig. 10.1 shows some of the paths taken in the magnetic field by the radiation emitted from the
sample.

magnetic field directed into page

sample

Fig. 10.1

(a) The direction of the magnetic field is into the page.

(i) On Fig. 10.1, mark with a gamma symbol (γ) any of the paths taken by the gamma
radiation. [1]

(ii) Determine the other type of radiation emitted by iodine-131.

Explain how you obtain your answer.

type of radiation .................................................................................................................

explanation ........................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[4]

(iii) In another experiment, the beam of radiation from the sample is incident on a 5 mm thick
sheet of lead.

State what happens to the two types of radiation in the beam.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

Question 10 continues over the page.

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23 [Turn over

 16

(b) The gamma radiation produced has a frequency of 8.8 × 1019 Hz.

The speed of electromagnetic radiation in a vacuum is 3.0 × 108 m / s.

Calculate the wavelength of this gamma radiation in a vacuum.

wavelength = ..................................................... m [2]

[Total: 9]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/O/N/23

 Cambridge O Level
* 8 3 7 0 7 6 5 6 4 4 *

PHYSICS 5054/21
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2023

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages.

DC (DE/JG) 316498/4
© UCLES 2023 [Turn over
 2

1 An aircraft pulls a glider along a runway as shown in Fig. 1.1.

glider

aircraft

runway

Fig. 1.1

Fig. 1.2 shows the speed of the glider during the first 12 s of the motion.

25

20
speed
m/s
15

10

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
time / s

Fig. 1.2

(a) Describe the motion of the glider in the first 12 s.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23

 3

(b) In the first 6.0 s of the motion, there is a resultant force of 1800 N on the glider.

Using the increase in speed in the first 6.0 s, calculate the mass of the glider.

mass = .................................................... kg [3]

(c) Determine the distance travelled by the glider in the first 6.0 s of its motion.

distance = ..................................................... m [2]

(d) The glider has no engine and stays in the air with the use of convection currents.

(i) State what is meant by a ‘convection current’.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest how the convection current that supports the glider is formed.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23 [Turn over

 4

2 In a safety test, a car of mass 1100 kg travels at a speed of 10 m / s and collides with a stationary
van of mass 3000 kg.

After the collision the car and the van move together with a velocity v.

Fig. 2.1 shows the car and van before and after the collision.

car mass = 1100 kg van mass = 3000 kg velocity = v

velocity = 10 m / s velocity = 0 m / s

before collision after collision

Fig. 2.1

The total momentum of the car and van is conserved during the collision.

(a) (i) Define ‘momentum’.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State the unit of momentum.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Calculate the velocity v of the car and van after the collision.

v = ................................................. m / s [2]

(c) (i) Calculate the total kinetic energy of the car and van after the collision.

kinetic energy = ...................................................... J [2]

(ii) State the transfer of energy that occurs in the collision.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23
 5

3 Fig. 3.1 shows a circuit containing three resistors, a 12 V power supply and an ammeter.

12 V
+ –

A
400 Ω 200 Ω 100 Ω

Fig. 3.1

(a) Calculate the current in the 400 Ω resistor.

current = ...................................................... A [2]

(b) Calculate the power produced in the 400 Ω resistor.

power = ..................................................... W [2]

(c) A student uses all of the components shown in Fig. 3.1 in another circuit.

She connects them so that there is the largest possible current in each resistor.

The current in one of the resistors is larger than the current in the other two resistors. The
student connects the ammeter into the circuit to measure the current in this resistor.

Draw the circuit diagram of the arrangement. Label each resistor with the value of its
resistance.

[2]

[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23 [Turn over
 6

4 (a) A student pushes a drawing pin into a wooden board, as shown in Fig. 4.1.

drawing pin

wooden board
finger

Fig. 4.1

The area of the pin in contact with the finger is 5.0 × 10−5 m2. The student pushes downwards
with a force of 26 N.

The mass of the drawing pin is very small.

(i) Calculate the pressure exerted by the finger on the drawing pin.

pressure = .................................................... Pa [2]

(ii) Compare the force exerted by the finger on the drawing pin with the force exerted by the
drawing pin on the wooden board.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Explain why the drawing pin goes into the wooden board but not into the finger.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23

 7

(b) Fig. 4.2 shows water emerging from a plastic bag that contains a number of small holes.

Fig. 4.2

(i) Explain why the water emerges from each hole in a direction at right angles to the surface
of the bag.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The holes at A and B are the same size.

Explain why the water emerges faster from the hole at A than from the hole at B.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23 [Turn over

 8

5 Fig. 5.1 shows the particles (molecules) in a sample of liquid water.

Fig. 5.1

(a) Explain, using ideas about particles, why liquids expand more than solids for the same
temperature rise.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The boiling point of water is 100 °C.

(i) State the boiling point of water on the Kelvin scale of temperature.

boiling point = ...................................................... K [1]

(ii) The temperature remains constant as water turns from liquid to gas at the boiling point.

Explain, in terms of particles, why energy must be provided even though the temperature
stays constant.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23

 9

(c) An electric heater is used to heat a sample of metal, as shown in Fig. 5.2. There is no thermal
energy transferred from the metal to the surroundings during the heating.

thermometer electric heater

sample of metal

Fig. 5.2

The metal has a mass of 200 g and is initially at 15 °C.

The heater is switched on for 2.0 minutes and then switched off. The maximum temperature
reached by the metal is 40 °C.

The power of the heater is 20 W.

Calculate the specific heat capacity of the metal.

Show your working.

specific heat capacity = ........................................... J /(g °C) [3]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23 [Turn over

 10

6 The virtual reality headset in Fig. 6.1 contains a display and a lens, as shown in Fig. 6.2.

display virtual reality headset

Fig. 6.1

lens

display eye

Fig. 6.2 (not to scale)

The display is the object for the lens.

The lens acts as a magnifying glass and forms a virtual image of the display.

(a) (i) Describe where the display must be positioned relative to the focal length of the lens for
the lens to act as a magnifying glass for the image on the display.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain how a virtual image is formed.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23

 11

(b) An arrow on the display is 3.4 cm from the lens. The virtual image of the arrow is 22 cm from
the lens.

Fig. 6.3 shows the arrow O, the lens L and the virtual image of the arrow I, drawn on a grid
with a scale of 1:2.

2 cm

2 cm L

Fig. 6.3 (scale: 1 cm represents 2 cm)

(i) On Fig. 6.3, draw a ray diagram to show the formation of the virtual image I. [3]

(ii) Determine the focal length of the lens.

focal length = ................................................... cm [1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23 [Turn over

 12

7 A water wave in a ripple tank diffracts as it passes through the gap in a barrier.

Fig. 7.1 shows a drawing made by a student of the crests in the pattern.

Fig. 7.1

(a) State one way in which the student’s drawing of the crests is wrong.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The gap in the barrier is now made smaller than the wavelength, as shown in Fig. 7.2.

Complete Fig. 7.2 with at least three crests to show the new diffraction pattern.

Fig. 7.2
[2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23

 13

(c) In one part of the ripple tank, the water wave has a speed of 6.0 cm / s and a wavelength of
2.0 cm.

The wave then passes into a shallower region of the tank.

The speed of the wave in the shallow region is 4.0 cm / s.

(i) Define the term ‘wavelength’.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the frequency of the wave.

frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]

(iii) Calculate the wavelength of the wave in the shallow part of the tank.

wavelength = ................................................... cm [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23 [Turn over

 14

8 A filament lamp is arranged above a shiny metal surface, as shown in Fig. 8.1.

shiny metal filament lamp

surface

Fig. 8.1

A student reads in a textbook that a light-emitting diode (LED) is more efficient than a filament
lamp.

(a) (i) State what is meant by ‘efficiency’.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest why the efficiency of a filament lamp is very low.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The student considers replacing the filament lamp shown in Fig. 8.1 with an LED of the same
brightness.

Data about the filament lamp and a suitable LED are shown in Table 8.1.

Table 8.1

input power / W energy efficiency

filament lamp 120 6.2%
LED 15 –

The LED emits the same amount of visible light as the filament lamp.

Using this information and the data in Table 8.1, determine the efficiency of the LED.

efficiency = ..................................................... % [2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23

 15

(c) The filament lamp is connected to the live and neutral wires in the mains supply.

The earth wire in the mains supply is connected to the shiny metal surface shown in Fig. 8.1.

There is a fuse in the live wire.

By accident, the live wire touches the shiny metal surface.

(i) Describe what then happens.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) In another similar lamp, the fuse is wrongly connected into the earth wire.

Explain why a person is not protected when the live wire touches the shiny metal surface.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23 [Turn over

 16

9 Fig. 9.1 shows a simple a.c. generator.

coil

N B S

A
slip rings
coil

voltage
output

brush

Fig. 9.1

(a) Explain why there is a voltage induced in the coil when the coil is turned.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) In Fig. 9.1 the coil is horizontal, with side AB on the left. The output voltage is +6.0 V.

On Fig. 9.2 draw a line from each of the shaded boxes to one of the circled voltages to show
the voltage output when the coil is in different positions.

One line has been drawn for you.

coil horizontal with AB on the left

+6.0 V

coil horizontal with AB on the right

0V
coil vertical with AB on the top

–6.0 V
coil vertical with AB on the bottom

Fig. 9.2
[2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23

 17

(c) Both an a.c. generator and a d.c. motor contain a coil and brushes.

(i) Fig. 9.1 shows how the brushes are connected to the coil in an a.c. generator.

Draw a diagram to show how the brushes are connected to the coil in a d.c. motor.

[2]

(ii) State why there are forces on the sides of the coil in a d.c. motor.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23 [Turn over

 18

10 Carbon-14 is an isotope of carbon. It undergoes radioactive decay with a half-life of 6000 years.
The age of a sample of wood is found using the carbon-14 that it contains.

(a) Describe what happens during radioactive decay.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The count rate of the carbon-14 in the sample of wood is initially 1600 counts / minute.

On Fig. 10.1 draw a graph to show how the count rate will vary over the next 24 000 years.

The initial count rate is already marked with an x.

1600

count rate 1400

counts / minute
1200

1000

800

600

400

200

0
0 4000 8000 12 000 16 000 20 000 24 000
time / years

Fig. 10.1
[2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23

 19

(c) Name the apparatus used to measure the radiation from the sample of wood and describe
how it is used to measure the count rate.

apparatus used .........................................................................................................................

how the apparatus is used ........................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(d) Describe how the count rate from a sample of wood is used to find its age.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 8]

Question 11 begins over the page

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23 [Turn over

 20

11 Table 11.1 shows details about eight planets in the solar system, their average distance from the
Sun, their orbital period and their average surface temperature.

Table 11.1

distance from the average surface

planet orbital period / s
Sun / km temperature / °C

5.8 × 107 7.6 × 106 167

.............................
Venus 1.1 × 108 1.9 × 107 464

Earth 1.5 × 108 3.2 × 107 15

Mars 2.3 × 108 5.9 × 107 −65

7.8 × 108 3.7 × 108 −110

.............................
Saturn 1.4 × 109 9.3 × 108 −140

2.9 × 109 2.6 × 109 −195

.............................
Neptune 4.5 × 109 5.2 × 109 −200

(a) Complete Table 11.1 by adding the names of the three planets that are not given. [2]

(b) Calculate the orbital speed of Mars as it travels around the Sun.

orbital speed = ................................................ km / s [2]

(c) Describe the relationship between the distance of a planet from the Sun and its orbital period.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) Describe the relationship between the distance from the Sun and the average surface
temperature of a planet.

In your description, include any anomalies.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 5054/21/M/J/23
 Cambridge O Level
* 9 9 6 0 0 5 0 2 2 5 *

PHYSICS 5054/22
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2023

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 16 pages.

DC (CE/SW) 316499/4
© UCLES 2023 [Turn over
 2

1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed–time graph for a car travelling on a straight horizontal road.

20
speed
m/s

10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50
time / s

Fig. 1.1

(a) Describe the motion of the car shown in Fig. 1.1.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) At time t = 10 s the engine of the car is switched off. The brakes are not applied.

(i) Name two forces that act on the car to cause the change in motion after t = 10 s.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................
[1]

(ii) Suggest why Fig. 1.1 is a curve after t = 10 s.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23

 3

(c) Between t = 10 s and t = 20 s the speed of the car changes from 18 m / s to 11 m / s.

The mass of the car is 1200 kg.

(i) Calculate the change in momentum of the car in this time.

Give the unit of your answer

momentum change = ...................................... unit ........... [2]

(ii) Calculate the average resultant force exerted on the car during this time.

average resultant force = ..................................................... N [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23 [Turn over

 4

2 Fig. 2.2 shows a rider on an electric scooter.

Fig. 2.2

The scooter contains a battery and a motor to drive the back wheel.

(a) (i) State the name of the energy store in the battery.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Describe, in terms of work done, the stages of energy transfer from the energy store in
the battery to the kinetic energy of the scooter.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The total mass of the scooter and the rider is 70 kg.

Calculate the total kinetic energy of the rider and scooter when the scooter has a speed of
4.0 m / s.

kinetic energy = ...................................................... J [2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23

 5

(c) The battery is marked ‘energy capacity 0.35 kilowatt-hour (kW h)’.

(i) Define what is meant by a kilowatt-hour.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The scooter stops working because the battery is totally discharged (flat). This means
that there is no more energy stored in the battery.

The battery is then recharged using a 70 W power supply.

Calculate the time taken to fully recharge the battery.

time = ............................................... hours [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23 [Turn over

 6

3 A fixed mass of gas in a glass tube is trapped by a seal at one end of the tube and by a column of
mercury. The mercury is free to move within the tube.

The tube is rotated slowly from the vertical as shown in Fig. 3.1 to the horizontal as shown in
Fig. 3.2. The volume of the gas increases and its temperature remains constant.

mercury sealed gas mercury

end
0.30 m

Fig. 3.2 (not to scale)

gas

sealed end

Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)

(a) (i) Describe why rotating the tube changes the pressure of the gas in the sealed end.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain, using ideas about particles, why the pressure of the gas decreases when its
volume increases.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) In Fig. 3.1 the length of the mercury column is 0.30 m.

The density of mercury is 14 000 kg / m3.

Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa.

Calculate the pressure of the gas in the tube.

pressure = .................................................... Pa [3]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23
 7

(c) The pressure of a different sample of gas changes at constant temperature.

Fig. 3.3 shows one point, marked X, on a graph of pressure against volume for the gas
sample.

At X the pressure of the gas is P0 and its volume is V0.

2P0

pressure

P0 X

½P0

0
0 ½V0 V0 2V0
volume

Fig. 3.3

On Fig. 3.3, sketch the graph as the pressure of the gas decreases from 2P0 to ½P0. [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23 [Turn over

 8

4 Fig. 4.1 shows the particles (atoms) at one instant in a sample of iron at a temperature below its
melting point.

Fig. 4.1

(a) (i) State the lowest possible temperature on the Celsius scale and on the Kelvin scale.

Celsius scale ............................. °C Kelvin scale ............................. K [1]

(ii) The temperature of the solid increases. The sample remains a solid.

Describe how the motion of the particles changes.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) The solid melts.

State what happens to the internal energy and the temperature of the solid as it melts.

internal energy ..................................................................................................................

temperature .......................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) A student:

• places a 300 g piece of iron in boiling water until the iron is at a temperature of 100 °C
• removes the iron from the water and places it immediately into 100 g of water at 25 °C.

The iron cools and the water warms until both reach the same temperature, 44 °C.

The specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 J / (g °C). No energy is lost to the surroundings.

(i) Calculate the change in energy (internal energy) of the water as it warms up.

change in energy = ...................................................... J [2]

(ii) Calculate the specific heat capacity of iron.

specific heat capacity = ........................................... J / (g °C) [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23

 9

5 Water waves are transverse waves.

(a) Underline two other examples of transverse waves.

seismic P-waves seismic S-waves sound X-rays [1]

(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a wooden bar and a glass block in a ripple tank. The depth of water in the tank
is less than the height of the glass block.

wooden
bar

ripple
tank

crests glass block

Fig. 5.1 (not to scale)

The wooden bar moves up and down once every 0.15 s to create the crests.

(i) The speed of the water wave is 27 cm / s.

Calculate the frequency and the wavelength of the wave.

frequency = ......................................................... Hz

wavelength = ......................................................... cm
[3]

(ii) The wave diffracts at the right-hand edge of the glass block.

On Fig. 5.1 draw two crests after they pass the glass block to show the diffraction. [2]

(iii) Describe how a wave with a smaller wavelength is made with the wooden bar.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) Describe how a decrease in wavelength affects the diffraction.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23 [Turn over
 10

6 Fig. 6.1 shows an electric circuit containing a filament lamp, a resistor R, a 12 V battery and five
meters.

12 V

ammeter ammeter
A A
A1 A3
ammeter
A2
resistor R
A

V V
voltmeter voltmeter
V1 V2

Fig. 6.1

(a) (i) The reading on ammeter A1 is 0.25 A.

The reading on voltmeter V1 is 3.0 V.

Determine the readings on the other meters.

reading on ammeter A2 = ............................................................ A

reading on ammeter A3 = ............................................................ A

reading on voltmeter V2 = ........................................................... V

[2]

(ii) Calculate the resistance of resistor R.

resistance of resistor R = ..................................................... Ω [2]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23

 11

(iii) The resistor obeys Ohm’s law.

State Ohm’s law.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the current–voltage graph for the filament lamp.

0.40

0.30

current / A

0.20

0.10

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
voltage / V

Fig. 6.2

The battery in Fig. 6.1 is replaced with a different battery which has a different e.m.f.
(electromotive force).

The voltage across the lamp increases to 6.0 V.

Use data from the graph to determine the e.m.f. of the second battery.

Show your working.

e.m.f. = ...................................................... V [3]

[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23 [Turn over
 12

7 (a) Ultraviolet radiation is one component of the electromagnetic spectrum.

(i) State the name of two components of the electromagnetic spectrum that have a smaller
wavelength than ultraviolet radiation.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................
[1]

(ii) State one useful application of ultraviolet radiation.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Exposure to ultraviolet radiation from the Sun damages the eyes.

State one type of damage to the eye caused by ultraviolet radiation.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light. The ray passes into a semi-circular block of glass at A and
leaves the glass at B, travelling along the surface to C.

B C

40°
A

Fig. 7.1

(i) State the name given to the angle of incidence marked as 40°.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the refractive index of the glass.

refractive index = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23

 13

8 Fig. 8.1 shows a step-down transformer used to operate an electric bell.

core

primary coil secondary coil

input output
voltage voltage

Fig. 8.1

(a) State the material used for the core of the transformer.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) A current in the primary coil produces a magnetic field in the core.

Explain how an alternating voltage is produced in the secondary coil.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) The transformer has 4600 turns on the primary coil which is connected to a mains supply of
230 V.

An output of 5.0 V is used to operate the bell.

Calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil.

number of turns = ......................................................... [2]

(d) State one change that can be made to the transformer shown in Fig. 8.1 so that it can be
used as a step-up transformer.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23 [Turn over

 14

9 A radioactive source emits α-particles, β-particles and γ-radiation.

(a) (i) State which type of radiation produces the strongest ionising effect.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State which type of radiation is deflected most by a magnetic field.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a Geiger-Müller (G.M.) tube and counter. A radioactive source is placed 10 cm
from the G.M. tube.

In Fig. 9.2 a piece of metal 5 mm thick is placed between the source and the G.M. tube. The
readings on the counter have been corrected for background radiation and show the count
rate due to the source.

radioactive source counter

G.M. tube
radioactive source counter
G.M. tube
800
800
10 cm
10 cm Fig. 9.1

200
200
5 mm thick metal
5 mm thick metal

Fig. 9.2

(i) Explain how the readings show that the source emits β-particles and γ-radiation.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) State why the readings cannot be used to show that the source emits α-particles.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Describe one way that a radioactive source is moved safely in a school laboratory.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23
 15

10 (a) Astronomical distances are measured in light-years.

(i) State what is meant by ‘a light-year’.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The Sun is one star in the Milky Way galaxy.

State the approximate diameter of the Milky Way galaxy.

diameter of Milky Way = ....................................... light-years [1]

(b) There are several stages in the life cycle of a star.

(i) Complete Fig. 10.1 to show the stages that a massive star goes through after it has
used up most of the hydrogen at the centre of the star.

Use words from the following list:

nebula neutron star protostar red giant supernova white dwarf

massive star (much larger

than our Sun)

red supergiant

.............................................

............................................. and black hole or .............................................

Fig. 10.1
[2]

(ii) State the stage in the life cycle of a star where heavy elements are formed.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

Question 10 continues over the page.

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23 [Turn over

 16

(c) Current scientific understanding is that the universe began 14 billion years ago in an event
known as the Big Bang.

Explain one observation that supports the Big Bang Theory.

observation ...............................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

explanation ...............................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[4]

[Total: 9]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2023 5054/22/M/J/23

 Cambridge O Level
* 8 5 2 5 5 1 5 5 5 9 *

PHYSICS 5054/21
Paper 2 Theory October/November 2022

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (CJ/SG) 308182/3
© UCLES 2022 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 Fig. 1.1 shows a steel spring.

Fig. 1.1

(a) Describe an experimental procedure for obtaining the results needed to plot an
extension–load graph for this spring.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) In an experiment to obtain results for an extension–load graph, a spring is stretched beyond
its limit of proportionality.

(i) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the extension–load graph for this spring.

extension

0
0 load

Fig. 1.2
[2]

(ii) On your graph in Fig. 1.2, mark and label with a P the limit of proportionality. [1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 3

(c) The limit of proportionality for this spring occurs at a load of 8.5 N.

The extension of the spring is equal to 0.014 m when the load is equal to 3.5 N.

Calculate the extension for a load of 5.5 N.

extension = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22 [Turn over

 4

2 A child’s toy consists of a flexible track and a model car.

Fig. 2.1 shows a diagram of the toy.

model car
E
A track

0.45 m

B D
C

Fig. 2.1

The child first holds the car stationary at point A which is 0.45 m above the horizontal sections of
track BC and FG. The mass of the car is 0.12 kg.

The child then releases the car which travels towards point B. Both air resistance and friction
between the car and the track are negligible.

The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.

(a) Calculate the change in gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the car as it travels from A
to B.

change in g.p.e. = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 5

(b) Calculate the speed of the car when it reaches B.

speed = ......................................................... [3]

(c) After releasing it, the child expects the car to follow the track along the route ABCDEFG. In
fact, the model car does not reach F.

(i) Explain, in terms of energy, why the car does not go past D, which is also 0.45 m above
the horizontal track.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Immediately after being released at A, the car travels to B, to C and then to D.

Describe the motion of the car after it reaches D.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22 [Turn over

 6

3 A curved, glass tube is open at one end and sealed at the other.

A dense liquid is poured into the tube. The liquid traps air in the sealed end.

Fig. 3.1 shows the tube, the liquid and the trapped air.

liquid
h

trapped air

curved tube

Fig. 3.1

(a) The difference between the liquid levels is h. At room temperature, h is 0.57 m.

The density of the liquid is 1.4 × 104 kg / m3.

The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg and the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa.

Calculate the pressure of the trapped air.

pressure = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 7

(b) The trapped air in the tube is heated.

(i) The height of the trapped air in the tube is x.

Explain, in terms of molecules, why x changes when the air is heated.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) The trapped air reaches a constant temperature that is greater than its initial temperature.

Describe and explain the change in h in terms of the pressures involved.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22 [Turn over

 8

4 X-rays are transverse waves that are part of a spectrum of waves.

(a) State the name of the spectrum of waves that includes X-rays.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) (i) Explain what is meant by ‘frequency’.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State the name of the waves in this spectrum that have the greatest frequency.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) X-rays are used in hospitals to produce an image of broken bones.

(i) Explain how this is done. You may draw a diagram if you wish.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Explain why X-rays are not used for pre-natal scanning.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 9

5 Fig. 5.1 is a diagram that shows the number of particles in a charged atom (ion) of beryllium (Be).

nucleus

electron

Fig. 5.1

(a) The charge on an electron is –1.6 × 10–19 C. The charge on the ion is +3.2 × 10–19 C.

(i) Deduce, from the charge on the ion, the number of protons in its nucleus.

Show your working.

number of protons = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) Write down, in nuclide notation, the symbol for the nucleus of this charged atom.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The isotope in Fig. 5.1 is the only stable isotope of beryllium.

Explain the term ‘isotope’.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Explain what prevents electrons in an atom from escaping.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22 [Turn over

 10

6 An electromagnet is used to separate objects that are magnetic from objects that are non-magnetic.

Fig. 6.1 shows the electromagnet suspended from the arm of a crane.

crane electric cable

electromagnet

Fig. 6.1

(a) State the name of the metal from which the core of the electromagnet is made.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The electromagnet is powered by a 220 V d.c. (direct current) supply.

The electromagnet is switched on and the current in the circuit is 39 A.

(i) Calculate the power transferred to the electromagnet.

power = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 11

(ii) The d.c. supply is a set of batteries.

The batteries power the magnet for 4.5 hours before they need to be replaced.

Calculate the charge driven around the complete circuit in this time.

charge = ......................................................... [3]

(c) On a very cold morning, when the electromagnet is first switched on, the current is greater
than 39 A before decreasing to the usual value.

Explain why the current is initially greater than 39 A.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22 [Turn over

 12

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

7 Fig. 7.1 shows a child sitting on a sledge on a snow-covered hill of constant slope.

sledge

child

brake

snow-covered
hill

wall

Fig. 7.1 (not to scale)

At time t = 0, the child and the sledge begin to move down the hill in a straight line.

When the child sees a wall ahead, he applies the brake.

The child and sledge continue to travel in a straight line until they come to a stop before hitting the
wall.

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 13

Fig. 7.2 is the speed-time graph for the journey.

16

12
speed
m/s

0
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
t/s

Fig. 7.2

The brake is applied at t = 26 s.

(a) Fig 7.2 shows how the speed of the child and sledge varies over the whole of the journey.

Explain why, between t = 0 and t = 26 s, the speed varies in the way shown by the graph.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) At t = 26 s, the front of the sledge is 35 m from the wall.

Determine the distance between the front of the sledge and the wall when the sledge stops.

distance = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22 [Turn over
 14

(c) At t = 26 s, the child and sledge begin to decelerate.

(i) Determine the size of the deceleration.

deceleration = ......................................................... [3]

(ii) The mass of the child is 46 kg and the mass of the sledge is 9.0 kg.

Calculate the resultant force on the child and sledge as they decelerate.

resultant force = ......................................................... [2]

(iii) State the energy transfer that is taking place as the child and sledge decelerate.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) At t = 26 s, when the brake is first applied, the child jerks forwards on the sledge.

Explain why.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 15

8 A parallel beam of light travelling in air is incident on a glass lens.

The beam is perpendicular to the lens as shown in Fig. 8.1.

The dashed line P indicates the position of the lens. The centre of the lens is dot C.

rays of light

Fig. 8.1

(a) The lens is a diverging lens.

On Fig. 8.1:

(i) indicate the shape of the lens by drawing the outline of the lens around dashed line P [1]

(ii) draw the path taken by each ray of light after it passes through the lens. [2]

(b) Diverging lenses are used to correct short-sight.

(i) Fig. 8.2 is a simplified diagram of a short-sighted eye. Light from a distant object strikes
the eye lens and enters the eye.

On Fig. 8.2, continue the three rays in the eye until they reach the back of the eye.

back of eye

eye lens

light from distant object

short-sighted eye

Fig. 8.2
[2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22 [Turn over

 16

(ii) State how the image of a distant object detected by a normal eye differs from the image
detected by the short-sighted eye.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Explain how a diverging lens corrects the sight of a short-sighted eye viewing a distant
object.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) The focal length of the diverging lens is 4.0 cm.

An object of height 3.5 cm is placed 6.0 cm from the centre of the lens.

(i) Fig. 8.3 is a full-scale diagram drawn on a grid, on which the dashed line L represents
the lens and the arrow O the object.

1 cm

1 cm L

Fig. 8.3

By drawing on Fig. 8.3, find the position of the image I of object O. Draw image I and
label it I. [4]

(ii) Explain whether the image produced is real or virtual.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 17

(iii) On the grid in Fig. 8.3, write an E in a position from which an eye can see the image. [1]

(iv) Determine the linear magnification produced.

linear magnification = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22 [Turn over

 18

9 The power supply in an electric circuit is a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V.

(a) State two ways in which the e.m.f. of a battery differs from that of an alternating current (a.c.)
power supply.

1 ................................................................................................................................................

2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) The circuit includes three resistors and two open switches, S1 and S2.

Fig. 9.1 shows the circuit.

12 V
S1
Y

N S
30 Ω S2
Z
28 Ω

20 Ω

Fig. 9.1

YZ is a straight, horizontal section of connecting wire that lies between two magnets.

S1 is now closed.

(i) Calculate the current in YZ.

current = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain why YZ experiences a force.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 19

(iii) Tick the box which describes the direction of the force on YZ.

towards N towards Z

towards S downwards

towards Y upwards
[1]

(iv) Explain how the direction of the force on YZ is determined.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Switch S2 in the circuit in Fig. 9.1 is now also closed.

(i) Calculate the total resistance of the circuit.

resistance = ......................................................... [3]

(ii) Explain what happens to the force on YZ as switch S2 is closed.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) The current in the 20 Ω resistor is I20. The current in the 30 Ω resistor is I30.

State a value for the ratio I20 / I30.

ratio I20 / I30 = ......................................................... [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/O/N/22

 Cambridge O Level
* 5 0 6 2 8 0 5 8 5 1 *

PHYSICS 5054/22
Paper 2 Theory October/November 2022

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (LK/JG) 308183/2
© UCLES 2022 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 A train travels along a straight horizontal track. At time t = 0, the train passes through station P at
constant speed without stopping.

The driver applies the brakes 70 s before reaching station Q. The train decelerates.

Fig. 1.1 is the speed–time graph for the train from t = 0 until it stops at station Q.

80

speed
m/s
60

40

20

0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
train passes t/s train reaches
through station P station Q

Fig. 1.1

(a) Using Fig. 1.1, determine the distance between station P and station Q.

distance = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22

 3

(b) The mass of the train is 3.8 × 105 kg.

(i) Determine the deceleration of the train in the 70 s before it stops at station Q.

deceleration = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) Calculate the resultant force on the train as it decelerates.

resultant force = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22 [Turn over

 4

2 The foundations that support a building are long concrete cylinders that are pointed at one end.
A pile-driver is a machine that forces the pointed concrete cylinders into the ground.

Fig. 2.1 shows a pile-driver.

heavy block

concrete cylinder pile-driver

Fig. 2.1

A heavy block of mass 2.9 × 104 kg is lifted into the air then dropped onto the top of a concrete
cylinder. This forces the cylinder into the ground.

(a) Fig. 2.2 shows the heavy block.

1.8 m2

2.0 m heavy block

Fig. 2.2

The block is 2.0 m tall and has a cross-sectional area of 1.8 m2.

Calculate the density of the material used to make the block.

density = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22

 5

(b) The pile-driver lifts the block from the top of a concrete cylinder, through a height of 0.80 m.

The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.

(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the block.

gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) The block is then dropped from rest onto the top of the concrete cylinder.

Calculate the speed of the block just before it hits the concrete cylinder.

speed = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22 [Turn over

 6

3 Fig. 3.1 shows a man standing underneath an outdoor heater on a cold evening.

metal hood

red-hot
shiny surface metal screen

pullover

gas cylinder

Fig. 3.1

Gas in the cylinder at the base of the heater is the fuel for the heater. When the heater is operating,
the gas travels to the top of the heater where it burns.

(a) State the form of energy stored in the gas that is transferred by the heater.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22

 7

(b) A metal screen surrounding the burning gas is heated by the burning gas until it is red-hot.
The hot metal screen warms the man who is standing underneath it.

(i) Describe how thermal energy in the red-hot metal screen is transferred to the man and
how it warms him.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) At the top of the heater is a metal hood that has a shiny lower surface.

Explain why this makes the energy transfer from the metal screen more efficient.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) The air temperature decreases and the man puts on a black pullover.

Explain one way in which wearing the black pullover helps to keep the man warm.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22 [Turn over

 8

4 A sound wave, travelling in air or water, contains compressions and rarefactions.

(a) Describe an experiment to show that a medium is required to transmit sound waves. You may
draw a labelled diagram if you wish.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) When a sound wave passes through air or water, the molecules of the air or water move.

Describe the motion of the molecules due to the sound wave.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) Describe what is meant by ‘a rarefaction’.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22

 9

(d) Fig. 4.1 shows a dolphin.

Fig. 4.1

The range of audible sound frequencies for the dolphin is 75 Hz to 140 000 Hz.

In water, the speed of sound is 1500 m / s.

Calculate the smallest wavelength of sound in water that the dolphin can hear.

wavelength = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22 [Turn over

 10

5 The power supply in a circuit is made from several cells, each with the same electromotive force
(e.m.f.). The cells are connected in parallel.

(a) Explain what is meant by ‘electromotive force’.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) State one advantage of using several cells in parallel rather than a single cell as the
power supply.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) The power supply is connected in series to a resistor of resistance 4000 Ω and a thermistor.
There is a voltmeter in parallel with the resistor.

Fig. 5.1 is the circuit diagram.

4000 Ω V
power
supply

thermistor

Fig. 5.1

(i) The temperature of the thermistor increases.

Explain what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) The e.m.f. of the power supply is 1.5 V.

Calculate the reading on the voltmeter when the resistance of the thermistor is 8000 Ω.

reading = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22
 11

6 The primary coil of a transformer is connected to the mains supply. The voltage of the a.c. mains
supply is 240 V.

Fig. 6.1 is a diagram of the arrangement.

primary coil iron core

240 V

secondary coil

Fig. 6.1

(a) Explain why a voltage is produced in the secondary coil.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) There are 5600 turns on the primary coil of the transformer and 350 turns on the secondary coil.

(i) Calculate the output voltage of the transformer.

output voltage = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) The output of the transformer is connected to a 90 W filament lamp which operates at
normal brightness.

Calculate the current in the lamp.

current = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22 [Turn over
 12

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

7 Copper is sometimes chosen as a material to make pans for heating liquids.

A copper pan contains water at room temperature.

(a) The top surface of the water in the pan cools as water evaporates. A convection current
causes the rest of the water to cool.

Explain how this convection current is produced.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) The copper pan is now placed on a hotplate that is switched on.

(i) Name the process by which thermal energy passes through the base of the pan.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Copper remains a solid when heated up to 1000 °C.

State one other reason why it is sensible to make a pan out of copper.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) The water in the pan is heated from 17 °C until it starts to boil at 100 °C.

(i) The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C) and the pan contains 750 g of water.

Calculate the energy needed to increase the temperature of the water from 17°C
to 100°C.

energy = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22

 13

(ii) State two ways in which boiling differs from evaporation.

1 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2 ........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) At 100 °C the temperature of the water stops increasing, even though energy is still being
transferred to the water.

Explain, in terms of molecules, why thermal energy is needed to change the state of the
water from liquid to gas.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 106 J / kg.

Thermal energy is transferred to the boiling water at a rate of 1300 J / s.

Calculate the mass of water that boils away in the 10 minutes immediately after the
water reaches 100 °C.

mass = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22 [Turn over

 14

8 An uncharged plastic rod is rubbed with an uncharged woollen cloth.

As a result, the rod becomes negatively charged.

(a) Explain, in terms of particles, how the rod becomes charged and state what happens to
the cloth.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a metal sphere X on a plastic stand.

metal
sphere X

plastic
stand

Fig. 8.1

Explain why metals are electrical conductors and why plastics are electrical insulators.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22

 15

(c) The negatively charged plastic rod is held above sphere X.

Fig. 8.2 shows that it does not touch the sphere.

negative rod
– – – – – – –

metal
sphere X

Fig. 8.2

(i) By drawing on Fig. 8.2, show the distribution of charge on X. [2]

(ii) An earth wire is now connected to the metal sphere as shown in Fig. 8.3.

negative rod
– – – – – – –

earth wire

Fig. 8.3

State what happens to the charges on the sphere as the earth wire is connected.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22 [Turn over

 16

(iii) The earth wire in (ii) stays connected to the metal sphere.

Describe the distribution of charge on the sphere.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) The earth wire is disconnected from the sphere and then the negatively charged rod is
moved away from the sphere.

Explain what happens to the charges on the sphere as the charged rod is moved away.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) A second metal sphere Y is negatively charged.

There is an electric field surrounding Y.

(i) State what is meant by ‘electric field’.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Fig. 8.4 shows the negatively charged sphere Y. The negative charges are not shown.

Fig. 8.4

On Fig. 8.4, draw the pattern and mark the direction of the electric field lines surrounding
sphere Y. [3]

[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22
 17

9 Protactinium-234 (234
91 Pa) is a radioactive isotope of protactinium that decays to uranium-234
(234
92 U).

(a) Compare the nuclide notation 234 234

91 Pa with the nuclide notation 92 U and deduce what this
shows about what is emitted from a nucleus of protactinium-234 as it decays to uranium-234.

Place a tick (3) in the appropriate boxes of Table 9.1 to show what is deduced from comparing
the nuclide notations.

Table 9.1

yes no it is not possible to tell

an alpha-particle is emitted

a beta-particle is emitted

a gamma ray is emitted

[2]

(b) The most abundant isotope of protactinium is protactinium-231.

(i) Explain, by referring to their nuclear compositions, why protactinium-231 and

protactinium-234 are both isotopes of the same element.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain, by referring to their nuclear compositions, why protactinium-231 and

protactinium-234 are different isotopes of that element.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) A teacher places a radiation detector on a bench in a school laboratory and switches it on.

(i) The teacher measures and records the background radiation count rate.

Describe what is meant by ‘background radiation’ and state two significant sources of
the count rate recorded by the teacher.

background radiation .........................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

source 1 ............................................................................................................................

source 2 ............................................................................................................................
[3]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22 [Turn over

 18

(ii) The teacher moves a sample of protactinium-234 so that it is next to the detector.

Suggest one precaution that ensures that the sample is moved in a safe way.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The count rate is measured every 20 s with the sample present, and then corrected for
background radiation.

Fig. 9.1 shows a graph of the corrected count rate against time for the protactinium-234
sample.

60
count rate
counts / s

40

20

0
0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320
time / s

Fig. 9.1

The curve is the best-fit line.

Explain why many of the crosses do not lie on the curve.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22

 19

(iv) Using Fig. 9.1, determine the half-life of protactinium-234.

Show your working.

half-life = ......................................................... [3]

(v) The uranium-234 formed from the protactinium-234 is also radioactive. Its half-life is
many thousands of years.

Explain why the radiation from uranium-234 does not affect the count rates measured in
this experiment.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/O/N/22

 Cambridge O Level
* 6 3 5 6 2 2 3 4 4 9 *

PHYSICS 5054/22
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2022

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (CE/CT) 305642/2
© UCLES 2022 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 Fig. 1.1 shows a waterskier pulled horizontally across the water surface.

Fig. 1.1

The mass of the waterskier is 60 kg. The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.

(a) Calculate the weight of the waterskier.

weight = ......................................................... [1]

(b) Mass and weight have different units.

State two other differences between mass and weight.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) A boat pulls the waterskier to the right with a horizontal force of 50 N. The waterskier travels
at a constant speed.

(i) Explain, in terms of the horizontal forces acting, why the speed is constant.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The horizontal force acting to the right increases from 50 N to 70 N. The sizes of any
other forces are unchanged.

Calculate the acceleration of the waterskier.

acceleration = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 3

2 Fig. 2.1 shows a long cardboard tube, sealed at both ends, which contains many small pieces of
metal.

small
metal tube
pieces

Fig. 2.1

The tube is turned vertically so that the pieces of metal fall from one end to the other.
The temperature of the pieces increases as a result of the fall.

During the fall, the gravitational potential energy of the metal pieces is transferred to other forms
of energy.

(a) State two forms of energy to which the gravitational potential energy is transferred.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The pieces fall an average distance of 1.2 m during one turn. The total mass of the metal
pieces is 150 g.

(i) Calculate the loss in the gravitational potential energy of the pieces as they fall once.

The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.

loss in gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) A student turns the tube quickly. After the small metal pieces have fallen from one end to
the other 80 times, their temperature has increased by 7.0 °C.

Determine the specific heat capacity of the metal.

specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [3]

(iii) The student repeats the experiment, turning the tube more slowly.

Suggest why a different temperature increase is obtained.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22 [Turn over

 4

3 Fig. 3.1 shows a syringe mounted vertically in a block of wood and sealed at one end. A plunger is
free to move inside the syringe.

There is trapped air in the syringe.

plunger

syringe

trapped air

wood
sealed end

Fig. 3.1

The air inside the syringe exerts a pressure on the walls of the syringe.

(a) Define the term pressure.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Explain how the air molecules in the cylinder of the syringe create a pressure.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 5

(c) A 10 N weight is placed on top of the plunger. The plunger moves down slowly so that the
temperature of the air inside the syringe does not change.

Before the weight is placed on top of the plunger:

• the pressure of the air inside the syringe is 1.0 × 105 Pa

• the volume of the air is 50 cm3.

The cross-sectional area of the plunger is 1.2 × 10−4 m2.

(i) Calculate the pressure of the air in the syringe after the plunger stops moving.

pressure = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) Calculate the volume of air inside the syringe after the plunger stops moving.

volume = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22 [Turn over

 6

4 Fig. 4.1 shows a ray of white light incident on a glass prism.

glass
prism

P
white red
violet
Q

Fig. 4.1 (not to scale)

Refraction causes the white light to separate into different colours.

(a) Define the term ‘angle of refraction’.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) The angle of incidence of the white light as it enters the prism is 40° and the angle of refraction
for the red light is 25°.

Calculate the refractive index of the glass for red light. Show your working.

refractive index = ......................................................... [2]

(c) Using Fig. 4.1, state and explain how the refractive index for red light differs from the refractive
index for violet light.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(d) The source of white light used in Fig. 4.1 produces other types of electromagnetic radiation
as well as visible light.

State the name of the invisible radiation found at P and the invisible radiation found at Q.

at P ....................................................... at Q ....................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 7

5 (a) A student connects a battery, thermistor X and resistor Y in parallel, as shown in Fig. 5.1.

I X

Fig. 5.1

• The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is E.

• The current in X is I.
• The resistance of Y is greater than the resistance of X.

Tick two boxes, one to show the correct statement about the potential difference across Y
and the other to show the correct statement about the current in Y.

The potential difference across Y:

is less than E

is equal to E

is greater than E.

The current in Y:

is less than I

is equal to I

is greater than I.
[1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22 [Turn over

 8

(b) The student connects thermistor X in series with the resistor Y and a battery of e.m.f. 6.0 V, as
shown in Fig. 5.2.

6.0 V

X Y

Fig. 5.2

In this circuit, at room temperature, the resistance of thermistor X is 600 Ω and the current in
thermistor X is 0.0020 A.

(i) Calculate the power produced in the thermistor.

power = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) Calculate the resistance of Y.

resistance = ......................................................... [3]

(iii) The thermistor is cooled.

Explain why this causes the potential difference across Y to decrease.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 9

6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows part of a toy which contains two ring-shaped, permanent magnets. A plastic
rod passes through the centre of both magnets.

top magnet
plastic rod

bottom magnet
N N N
S S S

Fig. 6.1

The top magnet can move up and down freely around the plastic rod.

The magnetic poles on the bottom magnet are shown in Fig. 6.1.

(i) The top magnet floats in the air above the bottom magnet.

On Fig. 6.1, mark the poles on the top magnet and explain why it floats in the air above
the bottom magnet.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The top magnet is replaced with a ring made of iron.

Explain why the iron ring sticks to the bottom magnet.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22 [Turn over

 10

(b) A wire carrying a current passes at right angles through a piece of paper.

Fig. 6.2 shows a cross and circle where the current in the wire passes into the plane of
the paper.

piece of
paper

wire

Fig. 6.2

On Fig. 6.2, sketch three magnetic field lines to show the magnetic field pattern around
the wire.

Show the direction of the field on your sketch. [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 11

Section B begins over the page.

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22 [Turn over

 12

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

7 Fig. 7.1 shows the speed–time graph for a car travelling on a straight horizontal road.

20

16
speed
m/s
12

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
time / s

Fig. 7.1

(a) (i) Describe the motion of the car.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Using Fig. 7.1, calculate the distance travelled by the car during the 24 s of its motion.

Show your working.

distance = ......................................................... [3]

(iii) Calculate the average speed of the car during its motion.

average speed = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 13

(iv) A second car travels at a steady speed. It travels the same distance as the first car in the
24 s of the journey.

On Fig. 7.1, draw the speed–time graph for the second car. [2]

(b) The thinking distance is the distance travelled by a car between the time that a hazard is
seen and the time that the brakes are applied.

The braking distance is the distance travelled while the car slows down to rest.

Table 7.1 shows the thinking and braking distances for an alert driver when the car travels at
different speeds.

Table 7.1

speed thinking distance / m braking distance / m

km / h
20 9 2
40 18 9
60 20
80 36 36
100 45 56

(i) Complete Table 7.1. [1]

(ii) The time it takes for the driver to react to the hazard is constant at different speeds.

Explain how the table shows this.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) State what happens to the thinking distance and the braking distance when the driver is
tired.

thinking distance ...............................................................................................................

braking distance ................................................................................................................

[2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22 [Turn over

 14

8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a ripple tank and the crests of the water wave that is produced in it.

rubber
band
crest
water

wooden
bar

Fig. 8.1

The frequency of the water wave is 2.0 Hz and its amplitude is 3.0 mm.

(i) Calculate the number of crests produced in 1.5 s.

number = ......................................................... [1]

(ii) The height of the wave is measured from the level of the undisturbed surface of the
water. The height of the wave at one point is 0 at time = 0.

On Fig. 8.2, draw a graph to show how the height of the wave at this point varies with
time.

height / mm 4

0
–2

–4

–6
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time / s

Fig. 8.2
[2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 15

(b) (i) The frequency of the wave is increased.

Describe how the apparatus shown in Fig. 8.1 is adjusted so that the frequency of the
wave is increased.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State what happens to the speed and wavelength of the wave as the frequency increases.

speed ................................................................................................................................

wavelength ........................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) The apparatus shown in Fig. 8.1 can be used to demonstrate refraction.

(i) State the additional apparatus needed to demonstrate refraction.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Draw on Fig. 8.3 to show the refraction of the water wave.

Label a boundary where the refraction occurs.

ripple tank

wooden
bar

Fig. 8.3
[3]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22 [Turn over

 16

(d) Fig. 8.4 shows a connection to the internet made from a remote station A using a satellite
above the Earth’s surface.

Data is sent between stations A and B using microwaves which travel to and from the satellite.

Station B is connected directly to the internet using optical fibre.

satellite

station B
station A
to internet

Fig. 8.4 (not to scale)

The speed of microwaves is 3.0 × 108 m / s.

Stations A and B are each 560 km from the satellite.

(i) Calculate the time taken for data to travel from A to B using microwaves.

time = ......................................................... [3]

(ii) The same data can be sent from A to B in a shorter time along the surface of the Earth
using infrared waves to carry the information in optical fibres.

State one property that infrared waves and microwaves have in common.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Suggest one other advantage of using optical fibres to connect stations A and B directly.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 17

Question 9 begins over the page.

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22 [Turn over

 18

9 Thorium-229 is a radioactive isotope used in several medical applications that involve

alpha-particles and beta-particles.

(a) During ionisation, a helium atom becomes a helium ion.

Fig. 9.1 shows a diagram of a helium (He+) ion.

neutrons
electron

protons

Fig. 9.1

(i) State how the structure of a helium atom differs from the structure of the helium ion.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State how the structure of an alpha-particle differs from the structure of the helium ion.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) A nucleus of thorium-229 ( 229

90 Th) decays by alpha (α) emission to a nucleus of element
X.
229
90 Th X + 42α
The nucleus of X then decays to a nucleus of Y by beta (β) emission.
0
X Y + –1 β
Complete Table 9.1 to show the number of protons and neutrons in a nucleus of X and in
a nucleus of Y.

Table 9.1

nucleus number of protons number of neutrons

X
Y
[4]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 19

(b) Experiments can show that a sample of a material is radioactive.

Describe the apparatus and the procedure used to show that a sample emits both alpha-
particles and beta-particles.

You may draw a diagram of the apparatus, if you wish.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(c) (i) State what is meant by the half-life of thorium-229.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) A sample of pure thorium-229 contains 4.0 × 1014 atoms. After 22 000 years, the number
of atoms of thorium-229 in the sample is 5.0 × 1013.

Determine the half-life of thorium-229.

Show your working.

half-life = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2022 5054/22/M/J/22

 Cambridge O Level
* 1 8 6 1 0 9 8 0 8 6 *

PHYSICS 5054/21
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2022

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (CE/JG) 305640/2
© UCLES 2022 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 Fig. 1.1 shows a model of the human arm. The rubber band represents the muscle that moves
part of the arm XY up.

A mass is suspended from XY, as shown in Fig. 1.2. The weight of section XY is negligible and the
model is at rest.

rubber
band
rubber
band

Y 16 cm
pivot

pivot X Y
2.0 cm mass
X

Fig. 1.1 Fig. 1.2 (not to scale)

(a) (i) State two ways in which the dimensions of the rubber band change as the mass is
added to section XY.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State the form of energy stored in the stretched rubber band.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) (i) State the principle of moments.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 3

(ii) Explain why the force that the rubber band exerts on section XY is larger than the weight
of the mass.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The mass suspended from section XY in Fig. 1.2 has a weight of 4.0 N.

Calculate the force that the rubber band exerts on section XY.

force = ......................................................... [2]

(iv) Explain how your answer to (b)(iii) is different if the weight of section XY is not negligible.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22 [Turn over

 4

2 Fig. 2.1 shows a wind turbine.

circular
area

blades

Fig. 2.1

(a) The wind blows directly towards the turbine with a speed of 12 m / s.

In one second, 60 000 kg of air passes through the circular area swept out by the blades.

Calculate the kinetic energy of this mass of air.

kinetic energy = ......................................................... [3]

(b) A wind turbine releases no carbon dioxide into the atmosphere while generating electricity.
Compared with a coal-fired power station, this is an advantage of using a wind turbine.

(i) State one reason why it is important to reduce the amount of carbon dioxide produced.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest one advantage of using a coal-fired power station compared with a wind turbine.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 5

(c) A coal-fired power station releases 0.96 kg of carbon dioxide when it generates 1.0 kW h of
electrical energy.

(i) Define the kilowatt-hour (kW h).

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the mass of carbon dioxide saved when the wind turbine has a power output of
2000 kW and operates for 12 hours.

mass = ......................................................... [1]

(d) Wind energy is a form of renewable energy.

State the name of one other form of renewable energy.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22 [Turn over

 6

3 (a) Define latent heat of fusion.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) A sample of metal P at 100 °C is heated steadily until its temperature reaches 400 °C.

The melting point of the metal is 250 °C.

(i) On Fig. 3.1, sketch a graph to show how the temperature of the metal changes with time.

400
temperature / °C
350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0
0
time
[2]
Fig. 3.1

(ii) A sample of a different metal Q has a greater latent heat of fusion than the sample of P.

P and Q are metals with the same melting points and the samples have the same heat
capacity.

The experiment is repeated with the sample of Q. This sample is supplied with the same
amount of energy per second as is supplied to the sample of P.

Explain how the graph of temperature against time for Q differs from the graph in (b)(i).

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22
 7

4 Two parallel rays of light, one red and one blue, enter a glass prism.

Fig. 4.1 shows both rays of light before they enter the prism. The blue ray is also shown incident
on a different side of the prism after passing through the prism.

red light
c
blue light

glass

Fig. 4.1 (not to scale)

The ray of blue light strikes the left side of the prism at an angle equal to its critical angle c.

(a) (i) On Fig. 4.1, mark and label the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r for the
blue light as it enters the prism. [1]

(ii) On Fig. 4.1, continue the path of the blue light after it strikes the left side of the prism. [1]

(iii) The refractive index of glass for red light is smaller than the refractive index for blue light.

On Fig. 4.1, draw the path of the red light as it travels in the prism and after it strikes the
left side of the prism. [2]

(b) (i) State what is meant by the critical angle.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The refractive index of glass for blue light is 1.5.

Calculate the critical angle c for blue light in glass. Show your working.

c = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22 [Turn over

 8

5 Fig. 5.1 shows a simple d.c. motor used in a toy car.

N
axle
coil

S
A

………………………………………… …………………………………………

Fig. 5.1

Terminals A and B are connected to a battery and the motor rotates.

(a) On Fig. 5.1, add labels inside the boxes to identify the parts of the motor indicated. [2]

(b) State what happens to the rotation of the coil when:

(i) the number of turns on the coil is increased

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) the magnetic field between the poles of the magnet is reversed.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 9

(c) The power supply to the motor is switched on and off at a steady rate.

Fig. 5.2 shows how the speed of the toy car varies with time as a result of the power supply
being switched on and off.

speed

0
0 time

Fig. 5.2

(i) Describe the motion of the toy car.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The voltage supplied to the motor is switched on for a longer period of time and off for a
longer period of time, at a steady rate.

Suggest what happens to the motion of the toy car.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22 [Turn over

 10

6 (a) A light-dependent resistor (LDR) is used to sense the amount of light in a room.

Fig. 6.1 shows part of the circuit used. The LDR is not shown.

P Q
V

Fig. 6.1

(i) Complete Fig. 6.1 by drawing the circuit symbol for an LDR between points P and Q. [1]

(ii) Explain how the voltmeter reading changes as the amount of light falling on the LDR
increases.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Fig. 6.2 shows part of a circuit containing three resistors.

2.4 A 4.0 Ω
X 6.0 Ω Y
5.0 Ω

Fig. 6.2

The current in the 4.0 Ω resistor is 2.4 A.

(i) Show that the current in the 5.0 Ω resistor is 1.9 A.

[2]
(ii) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) between points X and Y.

p.d. = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 11

Section B begins over the page

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22 [Turn over

 12

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

7 Fig. 7.1 shows a toy helicopter. It can hover and travel through the air.

Fig. 7.1

A student flies the toy helicopter on a journey from A to B to C to D at a constant height.

Fig. 7.2 is a scale drawing of the path of the helicopter, viewed from above.

D C

40 m

North

35 m

10 m

A B

Fig. 7.2 (to scale)

(a) (i) Determine the total distance travelled by the toy helicopter.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The toy helicopter makes the journey in 40 s.

Calculate its average speed during the journey.

speed = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 13

(b) (i) State the difference between distance and displacement.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Determine the scale used to construct Fig. 7.2 and complete the sentence.

1 cm on the diagram represents .............................. on the path. [1]

(iii) Using Fig. 7.2, determine the size of the displacement of point D from point A.

Show your working.

size of displacement = ......................................................... [2]

(iv) Determine the angle between North and the direction of the displacement of point D from
point A.

angle = ......................................................... [1]

(v) State what is meant by velocity.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(vi) Another toy helicopter flies directly from point A to point D in 40 s.

Explain why the magnitude of the velocity of this toy helicopter is smaller than the answer
in (a)(ii).

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22 [Turn over

 14

(c) When the toy helicopter hovers at D, its motor fails and it falls. It reaches terminal velocity as
it falls.

Explain, in terms of the forces and acceleration, what happens as the helicopter falls and
reaches terminal velocity.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [5]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 15

Question 8 begins over the page.

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22 [Turn over

 16

8 Fig. 8.1 shows a water manometer.

When the water manometer is connected to a sealed container of gas and the tap is opened, the
water levels change, as shown in Fig. 8.2.

sealed gas tap

container
metre rule with cm cm
distances in cm
90 90

80 80
gas
70 70

60 60

50 50

40 40

30 30

20 water 20

10 10

Fig. 8.1 Fig. 8.2

(a) Define pressure.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) (i) Explain why the water levels are the same on both sides of the manometer in Fig. 8.1.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why the water levels change when the gas tap is opened with the manometer
connected as in Fig. 8.2.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Explain why the water levels stop changing at the levels shown in Fig. 8.2.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 17

(c) The water in the manometer has a density of 1000 kg / m3.

Atmospheric pressure is 1.00 × 105 Pa and the gravitational field strength g is 10 m / s2.

Calculate the pressure of the gas inside the sealed container.

Give your answer to 3 significant figures.

pressure = ......................................................... [4]

(d) The temperature of the gas inside the sealed container increases.

Using ideas about molecules explain why the water levels change.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(e) This manometer is not suitable for measuring a gas pressure of 2.5 × 105 Pa.

(i) Explain why.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State one change to this manometer that allows it to measure a gas pressure of
2.5 × 105 Pa in a normal school laboratory.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22 [Turn over

 18

9 Table 9.1 shows details of seven different nuclides.

Table 9.1

nuclide radiation emitted half-life

hydrogen-2 none −
hydrogen–3 beta 12 year
francium-223 beta 22 min
iridium-192 gamma 74 day
phosphorus-32 beta 14 day
radon−222 alpha 4 day
technetium-99 gamma 6 hour

(a) (i) Hydrogen-2 and hydrogen-3 are isotopes of the element hydrogen.

Define the term isotope.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The equation for the decay of phosphorus-32 (P-32) as it emits a beta particle is:

32 0 32
15 P → –1 β + 16 Q

Explain whether the equation shows that Q is another isotope of phosphorus. Q is not
the chemical symbol for the atom.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) One of the sources in Table 9.1 is used in a medical procedure to detect unusual bone
structures. It is injected into a patient and the radiation emitted is detected outside the body.

(i) State which source in Table 9.1 is most suitable for this type of medical use.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain two reasons for your choice

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 19

(c) Radon gas is one natural source of background radiation.

Some causes of background radiation are man-made, for example, X-rays.

(i) State one other natural source of background radiation.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State one other man-made source of background radiation.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) State one harmful effect of background radiation.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(d) One fusion reaction that occurs is:

2 3 4 .....
1H + 1H → 2 He + ..... X

(i) Complete the equation to show the missing proton and nucleon numbers. [1]

(ii) Deduce the name of particle X.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Suggest where this fusion reaction takes place.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(e) Compare the properties of alpha-particles and beta-particles in terms of their:

• ability to penetrate through materials

• ionising effects
• deflection in a magnetic field.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2022 5054/21/M/J/22

 Cambridge O Level
* 7 5 7 9 8 4 8 7 4 1 *

PHYSICS 5054/21
Paper 2 Theory October/November 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (LK/FC) 210708/3
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 Fig. 1.1 shows a wooden bench of weight 2000 N.

0.48 m
2.2 m

0.25 m
support

Fig. 1.1

(a) Each of the two supports has an area of 0.040 m2 in contact with the ground.

Calculate the pressure on the ground due to the bench.

pressure = ......................................................... [2]

(b) The centre of mass of the bench is 1.1 m from the left-hand end of the bench and 0.24 m from
the front.

(i) Suggest one reason why the centre of mass is in this position.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21

 3

(ii) There is a force exerted vertically downwards from the point P shown in Fig. 1.1.

Calculate the maximum force that can be exerted vertically downwards at P without the
bench rotating about the point Q shown in Fig. 1.1.

maximum force = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21 [Turn over

 4

2 Fig. 2.1 shows a man of mass 80 kg standing in a lift (elevator).

lift

man

floor

Fig. 2.1

The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.

(a) Calculate the weight of the man.

weight = ......................................................... [1]

(b) The lift accelerates upwards uniformly at 0.50 m / s2.

Calculate:

(i) the resultant upward force on the man

resultant force = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21

 5

(ii) the force exerted on the man by the floor of the lift.

force = ......................................................... [1]

(c) The lift accelerates upwards uniformly from rest for 4.0 s and then decelerates uniformly to
rest in 4.0 s. The total distance travelled is 8.0 m.

On Fig. 2.2, sketch the distance-time graph for this journey.

8.0

distance / m

0
0 4.0 8.0
time / s

Fig. 2.2
[3]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21 [Turn over

 6

3 A type of nuclear reaction takes place at the centre of the Sun. The reaction releases thermal
energy.

(a) State the name of the type of nuclear reaction that takes place at the centre of the Sun.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Thermal energy is emitted from the surface of the Sun into space. The energy is transferred
through the vacuum of space by thermal radiation.

(i) Describe the radiation that is emitted from the surface of the Sun.

..........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State the speed of this radiation in a vacuum.

speed = ......................................................... [1]

(iii) The Earth is 1.5 × 1011 m from the surface of the Sun.

Calculate the time taken for this radiation to travel to Earth.

time = ......................................................... [2]

(c) Explain one advantage of wearing white clothes on sunny days.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21

 7

4 In a coal-fired power station, coal is burnt and electrical energy is produced.

(a) State the form of energy in the coal that is transferred to electrical energy.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) (i) State the principle of the conservation of energy.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The quantity of electrical energy produced by the power station is much less than the
quantity of energy in the coal that is burnt to generate the electricity.

Explain why this is so.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) State one environmental consequence of generating electricity in coal-fired power stations.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21 [Turn over

 8

5 A plastic rod that is initially neutral is rubbed with a woollen cloth. After the rod has been rubbed, it
is positively charged.

(a) (i) Explain, in terms of particles, why the rod is now positively charged.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State what happens to the woollen cloth.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) An uncharged, conducting sphere is suspended from an insulating thread. The positively
charged rod is placed near to the sphere, as shown in Fig. 5.1.

insulating thread

sphere
rod

Fig. 5.1

(i) On Fig. 5.1, draw the distribution of charge on the sphere. [2]

(ii) Explain why the sphere is pulled towards the rod.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21

 9

6 A circuit contains a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 4.5 V, a 28 Ω resistor and a variable
resistor. Fig. 6.1 is the circuit diagram.

4.5 V

28 Ω

Fig. 6.1

(a) The battery consists of three identical cells in series.

Determine the e.m.f. of each cell.

e.m.f. of each cell = ......................................................... [1]

(b) The potential difference (p.d.) across the variable resistor is 2.5 V.

(i) State what is meant by potential difference.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Calculate the resistance of the variable resistor.

resistance = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21 [Turn over

 10

7 EITHER

Fig. 7.1 shows a solenoid connected to an ammeter.

N S

permanent magnet A

Fig. 7.1

The S-pole of a permanent magnet moves into the left-hand end of the solenoid.

The ammeter reading shows that there is a small positive current in the circuit.

(a) Explain why there is a current in the circuit when the magnet moves.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) When the magnet is inside the solenoid, it stops moving. It is then pulled back out of the
solenoid.

Explain what happens to the ammeter reading as the magnet moves out of the left-hand end
of the solenoid.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 5]

OR

Fig. 7.2 shows the symbol for a logic gate and its truth table.

input output
0 0 1
input output 0 1 0
input
1 0 0
1 1 0

Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21
 11

(a) State the name of the logic gate shown in Fig. 7.2.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Fig. 7.3 shows two of these logic gates connected to make a bistable circuit.

P X

Y
Q

Fig. 7.3

Terminals P and Q each have the logic level 0.

Terminal X has the logic level 1.

(i) Explain why terminal Y has the logic level 0.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Terminal P is briefly connected to a supply of logic level 1.

State the effect of this on the logic level of terminal X and the logic level of terminal Y.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) Terminal P returns to logic level 0 again.

State the effect of this return to value 0 on the logic level of terminal X and on the logic
level of terminal Y.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) State how this circuit exhibits the property of memory.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21 [Turn over

 12

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

8 A loudspeaker is made from a coil of wire fixed to a cardboard tube. The tube is attached to a
cardboard cone.

Fig. 8.1 shows part of the arrangement of the loudspeaker.

cardboard
cone
coil
cardboard tube

Fig. 8.1

When there is a current in the coil, the coil experiences a force.

(a) State what else is needed in a loudspeaker to make a current-carrying wire experience a
force.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) A student connects the coil to the output of an alternating current (a.c.) generator. Fig. 8.2
shows how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) produced by the generator varies with time.

4.0
e.m.f./ V
2.0

0
0 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.020
–2.0 time / s

–4.0

Fig. 8.2

The coil, tube and cone vibrate backwards and forwards.

(i) Explain why the e.m.f. shown in Fig. 8.2 makes the coil vibrate.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21
 13

(ii) The vibrating cone produces sound in the surrounding air.

Explain, in terms of molecules, how the cone produces a sound wave that travels through
the air.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iii) Sound is a longitudinal wave.

Describe the difference between a longitudinal wave and a transverse wave.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iv) Using Fig. 8.2, determine the number of times that the cone reverses its direction of
motion in 1.0 s.

number = ......................................................... [2]

(v) The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.

Calculate the wavelength of the sound.

wavelength = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21 [Turn over

 14

(c) The student adjusts the generator so that the maximum voltage of the output is now 3.0 V.
Everything else stays the same as the output shown on the graph in Fig. 8.2.

(i) Explain any effect on the loudness of the sound.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain any effect on the pitch of the sound.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21

 15

Question 9 starts over the page

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21 [Turn over

 16

9 Liquid-in-glass thermometers use the expansion of a liquid to indicate the temperature.

(a) Fig. 9.1 shows the molecular structure of a solid and a gas.

solid liquid gas

Fig. 9.1

(i) In the middle box of Fig. 9.1, sketch a diagram to show the molecular structure of a
liquid. [2]

(ii) Explain why it is easier to compress a gas than to compress a solid.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) The temperature of a liquid-in-glass thermometer increases.

State two ways in which the molecules of the liquid in the thermometer are affected.

1. .......................................................................................................................................

2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21

 17

(b) Fig. 9.2 shows the liquid-in-glass thermometer.

bulb narrow tube

liquid

Fig. 9.2

There is no scale on the thermometer.

(i) State what is meant by the ice point and the steam point.

ice point .............................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

steam point ........................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Describe how the ice point and the steam point are used on the thermometer.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) Explain how the range of a liquid-in-glass thermometer is affected by:

(i) increasing the mass of liquid in the bulb

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) increasing the diameter of the narrow tube.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21 [Turn over

 18

10 The isotope yttrium-90 ( 90

39 Y ) is radioactive. It is a beta-particle emitter that decays to product Q.
Product Q is stable.

(a) State one feature that is common to all isotopes of yttrium.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Describe how a neutral atom of Q differs from a neutral atom of yttrium-90.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) A sample of yttrium-90 is placed close to a radiation detector in a laboratory. There are no
other radioactive samples in the laboratory. A counter records the count rate.

Fig. 10.1 is a graph of the count rate plotted against time.

80
count rate
counts / minute

60

40

20

0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
time / s time / hours

Fig. 10.1

(i) Using Fig. 10.1, determine the average background count rate.

average background count rate = ......................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21

 19

(ii) Suggest two different origins for the background count.

1. .......................................................................................................................................

2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) Using Fig. 10.1, determine the half-life of yttrium-90. Show how the answer is obtained.

half-life = ......................................................... [4]

(iv) Many of the points plotted in Fig. 10.1 do not lie on the best-fit line.

Explain why.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) A beam of beta-particles, travelling in a vacuum, enters the region between two parallel, metal
plates. One plate is negatively charged and the other is positively charged.

Fig. 10.2 shows the arrangement.

+ + + + + +

beam of beta-particles

– – – – – –

Fig. 10.2

On Fig. 10.2, draw the path taken by the beta-particles as they travel between the two plates.
[2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/O/N/21

 Cambridge O Level
* 8 8 6 8 7 8 3 4 3 9 *

PHYSICS 5054/22
Paper 2 Theory October/November 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (NF/CB) 210709/2
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 Fig. 1.1 shows a jug of liquid and an empty measuring cylinder that is on an electronic balance.

measuring

cm3
cylinder jug

electronic
balance

34.9 g liquid

Fig. 1.1

(a) The electronic balance uses the weight of the measuring cylinder to determine its mass.

Weight and mass have different units.

State two other ways in which weight differs from mass.

1. ...............................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2. ...............................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) Describe how to determine the density of the liquid using the apparatus shown in Fig. 1.1.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

(c) The density of the liquid is 780 kg / m3.

Determine the volume of 0.65 kg of the liquid.

volume = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21
 3

2 Force is a vector quantity.

(a) State what is meant by a vector.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) A swimmer reaches the end wall of a swimming pool and turns around under the water.

Fig. 2.1 shows the swimmer immediately after turning around.

water surface

end wall

Fig. 2.1

(i) The swimmer pushes against the end wall of the pool with his legs.

Explain, in terms of Newton’s third law, why the swimmer accelerates away from the end
wall.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) While swimming, there is a constant forward force on the swimmer. His speed increases
until eventually he reaches a constant speed.

Explain why he reaches a constant speed.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21 [Turn over
 4

3 Fig. 3.1 shows light entering a transparent block.

transparent
block

θ
φ

Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)

The light enters the block at an angle θ to the normal and travels through the block until it meets
the bottom surface.

The angle between the ray in the block and the vertical side of the block is φ.

(a) Light travels more slowly in the block than in air.

(i) Explain how Fig. 3.1 shows this.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State what happens to the wavelength of the light and what happens to the frequency of
the light as it enters the block.

wavelength ........................................................................................................................

frequency ..........................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) The refractive index of the transparent material is 1.6. Angle θ is 45°.

(i) Determine angle φ.

φ = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 5

(ii) The angle of incidence i at the bottom surface is equal to φ and the critical angle for the
material of the block in air is 39°.

Explain what happens to the light after it meets the bottom surface.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21 [Turn over

 6

4 A washing machine is working normally with both the water heater and the motor switched on. The
washing machine is connected to the mains supply by a cable.

(a) The current in the live wire in the cable is 13 A.

State the size of the current in:

(i) the neutral wire in the cable

current in neutral wire = ......................................................... [1]

(ii) the earth wire in the cable.

current in earth wire = ......................................................... [1]

(b) The insulation on the mains cable is now damaged and, as the washing machine vibrates,
the live wire touches the metal casing.

(i) Explain how the earth wire and the fuse together prevent any more damage.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Explain why it is the live wire into which the fuse is connected.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 7

Question 5 begins over the page

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21 [Turn over

 8

5 EITHER

Fig. 5.1 shows a circuit that contains a direct current (d.c.) power supply, a light-dependent resistor
(LDR), two fixed resistors, M and N, and two ammeters.

ammeter 2
A
+
–
M N

A
ammeter 1

Fig. 5.1

(a) The reading on ammeter 1 is 1.6 mA.

Calculate the time taken for a charge of 7.2 C to pass through ammeter 1.

time = ......................................................... [2]

(b) Some time later, the brightness of the light incident on the LDR decreases.

Explain what happens to:

(i) the reading on ammeter 2

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) the time taken for a charge of 7.2 C to pass through ammeter 1.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 9

OR

Fig. 5.2 shows the symbol for an electronic circuit component.

Fig. 5.2

(a) State the name of the component shown in Fig. 5.2.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Fig. 5.3 is the diagram of a circuit that includes this component, a light-dependent resistor
(LDR) and a relay.

relay mains supply

motor

+
6.0 V
–

Fig. 5.3

The motor in Fig. 5.3 is part of the pump in a garden fountain. In the dark, the pump does not
work.

In the morning, the brightness of the light incident on the LDR increases.

(i) State what happens to the LDR.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why the motor switches on.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21 [Turn over

 10

6 Isotope X is radioactive. It decays by alpha-particle emission to a stable isotope.

(a) State how a nucleus of X changes when it emits an alpha-particle.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) There is a radiation detector in a laboratory where there are no radioactive samples.

The detector is switched on and shows an average count rate of 22 counts / minute.

(i) State why the radiation detector shows a count rate.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) A sample of isotope X is placed 2 cm from the detector and the reading displayed is
8000 counts / minute.

The sample is moved a distance of 10 cm from the detector. The reading returns to an
average value of 22 counts / minute.

Explain why the reading returns to the original value.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) An alpha-particle passes into a region where there is a magnetic field. In the magnetic field,
a force acts on the alpha-particle so that it follows a circular path. Fig. 6.1 shows that the
particle passes through point J.

J
path of alpha particle

magnetic field

Fig. 6.1

(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw an arrow through point J to show the direction of the force on the
alpha-particle at J. [1]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 11

(ii) Determine the direction of the magnetic field and mark a tick in the box (✓) that indicates
this direction.

to the left

to the right

towards the top of the page

towards the bottom of the page

into the page

out of the page

[1]

(iii) Explain whether this force does work on the alpha-particle as the particle moves along
the circular path.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21 [Turn over

 12

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

7 A hydraulic press is used at a recycling centre to compress waste material. Fig. 7.1 is a side view
of the press.

oil
P
force
upper
surface
pipe piston 1
of piston 2

piston 2

waste

ground

Fig. 7.1 (not to scale)

A force to the left is exerted on piston 1. Oil is pushed along the pipe and this moves piston 2
downwards. Piston 2 compresses the waste.

(a) Oil is a liquid.

(i) State the property of a liquid that makes it suitable for use in a hydraulic system.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain, in terms of molecules, why a liquid has this property.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) Suggest one advantage of using oil as the liquid in a hydraulic press.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 13

(c) The cross-sectional area of piston 1 is 0.018 m2.

Piston 1 exerts a force of 4500 N on the oil.

(i) Calculate the pressure of the oil due to this force.

pressure = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) The pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 × 105 Pa.

Calculate the total pressure of the oil in the pipe.

total pressure = ......................................................... [1]

(iii) The area of piston 2 that is in contact with the oil is 1.4 m2. Initially, the upper surface of
piston 2 is level with point P.

Calculate the force exerted on piston 2 due to the pressure calculated in (c)(ii).

force = ......................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21 [Turn over

 14

(d) (i) As piston 1 moves along the pipe:

• the pressure of the oil in the pipe at point P remains constant

• piston 2 moves downwards
• the pressure of the oil at the upper surface of piston 2 increases.

Explain why the pressure at the upper surface of piston 2 increases.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The density of the oil is 900 kg / m3. The upper surface of piston 2 is now 0.50 m below
the level of the pipe.

Calculate the increase in the force exerted at the upper surface of piston 2 by the oil.

[gravitational field strength g = 10 N / kg]

increase in force = ......................................................... [3]

(e) There is air trapped in the plastic bags that contain the waste.

The temperature of the air in the bags remains constant.

Explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure of the trapped air increases as it is
compressed.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 15

8 The turning effect of a force is measured by its moment.

(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a force F acting on an object at point P. The object is free to rotate about
an axis at X that is perpendicular to the page.

object
P

X F

Fig. 8.1

Write down an expression for the moment of F about the axis at X. Draw on Fig. 8.1 to show
what is meant by any other term used in your expression.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) (i) State the principle of moments.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Describe an experiment to verify the principle of moments. Include a diagram to help the
description.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21 [Turn over

 16

(c) A worker carries a ladder on his shoulder. His shoulder acts as a pivot. Fig. 8.2 shows that the
ladder is horizontal.

0.54 m
L ladder
1.3 m

centre of mass
0.90 m
bucket

Fig. 8.2

The ladder is wider at one end than at the other end. The mass of the ladder is 8.0 kg.

(i) The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.

Calculate the weight of the ladder.

weight = ......................................................... [1]

(ii) State what is meant by centre of mass.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The centre of mass of the ladder is not halfway along its length.

State what this shows about the ladder.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 17

(iv) The centre of mass of the ladder is a horizontal distance of 0.90 m from the worker’s
shoulder.

Calculate the moment about the worker’s shoulder of the weight of the ladder.

moment = ......................................................... [2]

(v) A bucket of weight 87 N is suspended from the ladder at a horizontal distance of 1.3 m
from the worker’s shoulder.

The worker keeps the ladder horizontal by exerting a vertical force at point L. L is a
horizontal distance of 0.54 m from his shoulder.

Determine the size and direction of the force exerted at L.

size of force = ...............................................................

direction = ...............................................................
[3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21 [Turn over

 18

9 A filament lamp is connected to a 240 V alternating current (a.c.) mains supply.

(a) Describe how the output of an a.c. supply differs from the output of a direct current (d.c.)
supply.

Sketch two voltage–time graphs in the blank space to help your explanation.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) The lamp is rated at 60 W and is designed to be used with a 240 V supply.

(i) Calculate the current in the lamp.

current = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) Calculate the resistance of the lamp.

resistance = ......................................................... [2]

(iii) A room is lit by five of these filament lamps connected in parallel.

State two advantages of connecting the lamps in parallel rather than in series.

1. .......................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

2. .......................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 19

(iv) The five lamps in (b)(iii) are lit for an average time of 5.5 hours a day for a year. Electricity
costs $0.15 / kW h.

Calculate the cost of using these lamps for a year.

cost = ......................................................... [2]

(c) A student takes the lamp in (b) to school and connects it in a circuit using a 1.5 V cell, an
ammeter and a voltmeter. The circuit is used to determine the resistance of the lamp.

(i) In the blank space, draw the circuit diagram of the circuit used to determine the resistance
of the lamp.

[2]

(ii) The value of the resistance of the filament lamp in this circuit differs greatly from the
value calculated in (b)(ii).

State how the resistance value in this circuit differs and explain why it differs.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/O/N/21

 Cambridge O Level
* 6 7 7 7 6 1 1 6 7 9 *

PHYSICS 5054/21
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.

DC (MB/FC) 205095/4
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 An aircraft flies at a constant height.

Air drag and the force from the aircraft’s engines together produce a force on the aircraft of 36 kN
due north, as shown in Fig. 1.1.

The wind produces a force of 12 kN towards the east.

north
36 kN

12 kN

Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)

(a) Draw a scale drawing to show the resultant force acting on the aircraft.

Use your drawing to determine the size of the resultant force and the angle between the
resultant force and north.

size of resultant force = ...............................................................

angle = ...............................................................
[3]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 3

(b) The acceleration of the aircraft is uniform.

(i) Describe how a uniform acceleration differs from a non-uniform acceleration.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The mass of the aircraft is 60 000 kg.

Calculate the acceleration of the aircraft.

acceleration = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21 [Turn over

 4

2 Fig. 2.1 shows a hollow metal cube filled with boiling water. The temperature of the four vertical
surfaces are equal but each surface has a different colour or texture.

metal thermal radiation sensor

cube

shiny
white
surface
40
meter

Fig. 2.1

A thermal radiation sensor is placed the same distance from each surface and the meter reading
measures the thermal radiation emitted from each surface.

(a) The results are shown in Fig. 2.2.

Draw a line linking each type of surface with the appropriate meter reading. One line has
been drawn for you.

type of surface meter reading

dull black 40

dull white 60

shiny black 80

shiny white 100

Fig. 2.2
[2]

(b) The hot surfaces produce a convection current in the air outside the metal cube.

Describe how the convection current is produced.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 5

3 A hot steel rod is cooled by plunging it into cold water, as shown in Fig. 3.1.

steel rod

Fig. 3.1

(a) The steel rod has a mass of 2.0 kg and is initially at a temperature of 500 °C.
It cools to 50 °C when placed in the water.

The specific heat capacity of steel is 460 J / (kg °C).

Calculate the thermal energy (heat) lost by the steel rod as it cools to 50 °C.

thermal energy = ......................................................... [3]

(b) A small mass of water boils when the rod is placed in the water. The remaining water then
cools to room temperature and some of it evaporates.

In both boiling and evaporation, water molecules escape into the air.

(i) State one way in which boiling is different from evaporation.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The rate of evaporation decreases as the water cools.

Explain why this happens, using ideas about molecules.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21 [Turn over
 6

4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a wave on a rope and Fig. 4.2 shows a wave on a spring. Both waves are
moving in the direction shown by the arrows.

Fig. 4.1

X
X

Fig. 4.2

(i) State the name of each of the two types of wave shown.

Fig. 4.1 ..............................................................................................................................

Fig. 4.2 ..............................................................................................................................

[1]

(ii) On Fig. 4.1, draw a wave which has a smaller frequency than the wave shown. [1]

(iii) Describe the movement of point X on the spring in Fig. 4.2 as the wave passes.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Table 4.1 shows some sentences that a student writes about waves.

His teacher places a ring around each mistake.

Write a suitable correction for each mistake in Table 4.1. One has been done for you.

Table 4.1

sentence correction

Sound travels at 3.0 × 108 m / s in air. 330

Sound with a higher pitch has a larger amplitude.

X-rays are used for pre-natal scanning.

In the electromagnetic spectrum, microwaves have the
highest frequency.
[3]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 7

5 Fig. 5.1 shows part of the ray diagram of a lens being used as a magnifying glass.

Three rays are shown coming from the top of an object O.

The points labelled F are one focal length from the lens.

F F

Fig. 5.1

(a) State the name of the type of lens shown in Fig. 5.1.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Describe what happens to the ray of light R:

• as it enters the lens ................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

• as it leaves the lens. ...............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(c) Using all three rays from O, complete Fig. 5.1 to show the image formed. [2]

(d) Underline all of the words in the list that describe the image formed in (c).

inverted upright real virtual

[1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21 [Turn over

 8

6 A student moves a metal bar upwards between the poles of a magnet, as shown in Fig. 6.1.

direction of
movement

A
N S
metal
bar

Fig. 6.1

The ammeter connected to the metal bar shows a small positive reading as the bar moves.

(a) Explain why there is a reading on the ammeter.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Complete Table 6.1 by stating what the ammeter shows when the metal bar moves in the
direction shown by the arrow in each diagram.

Table 6.1

reading shown on the ammeter

............................................................................
A
N S
............................................................................

............................................................................
A
N S
............................................................................

A ............................................................................
N S
............................................................................

[3]
© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21
 9

(c) The student finds that using a stronger magnet increases the reading on the ammeter.

State one other way in which the student can produce a larger reading on the ammeter, using
the same rod.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) Describe how Lenz’s law applies when the bar is moved upwards.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21 [Turn over

 10

7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows two circuit components.

thermistor LDR

Fig. 7.1

For each of these components state what causes an increase in its resistance.

thermistor ..................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

LDR ..........................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a battery connected to a diode, an ammeter and a resistor.

Fig. 7.3 shows the current – voltage graph for the diode.

current

0
0 0.6
A voltage / V

Fig. 7.2 Fig. 7.3

The current in the resistor is 2.0 A and the potential difference across the resistor is 5.4 V.

(i) State what is meant by the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why the e.m.f. of the battery must be greater than 5.4 V.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 11

(iii) Calculate the electrical energy input to the resistor in 5.0 minutes.

energy input = ......................................................... [2]

(iv) The circuit is reconnected with the diode in the opposite direction, as shown in Fig. 7.4.

Fig. 7.4

Explain what is observed.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21 [Turn over

 12

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

8 Fig. 8.1 shows a stationary horse and its rider, about to jump over two fences.

fences

Fig. 8.1

(a) Fig. 8.2 shows a side view of the horse.

Fig. 8.2

(i) On Fig. 8.2, draw and label the forces acting on the horse.

Include the force that the rider exerts on the horse. Label this force F. [3]

(ii) Explain how Newton’s third law applies to force F.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 13

(b) Fig. 8.3 shows a side view of the two fences. They both have the same height and a uniform
density.

Fig. 8.3

(i) On each fence in Fig. 8.3, mark with a cross the centre of mass. [2]

(ii) Explain why a wider base makes the fence more stable.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) The total mass of the horse and rider is 520 kg.

(i) As they approach a fence, the horse and rider have a total kinetic energy of 4000 J.

Calculate their speed.

speed = ......................................................... [3]

(ii) The centre of mass of the horse and rider is 1.4 m above the ground.

The maximum potential energy gained by the horse and rider as they jump over the
fence is 3000 J.

Calculate the maximum height above the ground of the centre of mass during the jump.

The gravitational field strength g = 10 N / kg.

height = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21 [Turn over

 14

9 Fig. 9.1 is the current – voltage graph for a filament lamp.

1.8

1.6
current / A
1.4

1.2

1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
voltage / V

Fig. 9.1

(a) Fig. 9.2 shows an incomplete circuit diagram of the circuit that a student uses to obtain the
readings for the graph.

Fig. 9.2

Complete the circuit diagram using suitable circuit symbols for the lamp, a voltmeter and a
variable resistor. [3]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 15

(b) The ammeter used by the student has ranges 0−10 A, 0−1 A, 0−100 mA and 0−10 mA.

Describe how the student uses the different ranges to obtain readings which allow all nine
points to be plotted precisely on the graph while using the ammeter safely.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) State how Fig. 9.1 shows that the lamp does not obey Ohm’s law.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(d) Using Fig. 9.1, determine the resistance of the lamp when:

(i) the voltmeter reading is 0.40 V

resistance = ...............................................................

(ii) the voltmeter reading is 6.0 V.

resistance = ...............................................................
[3]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21 [Turn over

 16

(e) (i) Explain why the resistance of the lamp changes as the voltage changes.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State how the resistance of a wire depends upon its length and how it depends on its
cross-sectional area.

length ................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

cross-sectional area ..........................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

(iii) The student obtains a long sample of the same type of wire as the filament in the lamp.

The wire he obtains has the same cross-sectional area as the filament.

He cuts a 1.0 m length of the wire and measures its resistance at room temperature.

He obtains the value 16 Ω.

Using the appropriate resistance value from (d), estimate the length of the filament wire
in the lamp.

length = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 17

BLANK PAGE

Question 10 begins over the page

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21 [Turn over

 18

10 Table 10.1 contains details of the nature and some properties of alpha, beta and gamma emissions.

Table 10.1

alpha beta gamma

2 protons and
nature
2 neutrons

charge negative

stopped by 5 mm of
penetrating power
aluminium

(a) Complete Table 10.1 by filling in the missing details. [6]

(b) Surgical instruments in sealed plastic bags are placed in thin plastic boxes. A conveyor belt
takes the boxes close to a cobalt-60 source which sterilises the instruments.

This is shown in Fig. 10.1.

thick
concrete
cobalt-60
source

boxes of
surgical
instruments

conveyor belt

Fig. 10.1 (viewed from above)

The cobalt-60 source is a radioactive isotope of cobalt that emits gamma-radiation.

(i) Describe what is meant by the term isotope.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Suggest a property of gamma-radiation that enables it to sterilise the instruments in the
bags in the boxes.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 19

(iii) State why a source emitting only alpha-radiation cannot be used in this way.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iv) The half-life of cobalt-60 is 5.3 years.

Explain why a source with a half-life of 5.3 minutes is unsuitable for use in this application.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Geiger and Marsden performed an experiment in which alpha-particles were fired at a thin
film of gold.

(i) Fig. 10.2 shows an alpha-particle passing close to the nucleus of a gold atom.

path of alpha-particle

nucleus of gold atom

Fig. 10.2

Explain why the alpha-particle is deflected.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) In the experiment, most of the alpha-particles pass straight through the foil without
deflection.

Explain, using ideas about the structure of the atom, why this happens.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 5054/21/M/J/21

 Cambridge O Level
* 1 7 5 6 4 7 4 7 4 9 *

PHYSICS 5054/22
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2021

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages.

DC (MB/FC) 205096/3
© UCLES 2021 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 (a) (i) State the difference between a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State two examples of each type of quantity.

scalar quantity vector quantity

1 ...................................................... 1 ......................................................

2 ...................................................... 2 ......................................................
[2]

(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the direction and size of two vectors P and Q.

Fig. 1.1

In the space next to Fig. 1.1, draw a labelled vector diagram to show the resultant vector
obtained by adding vector P to vector Q.

Draw vector P, vector Q and the resultant vector to the same scale as in Fig. 1.1.
[2]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 3

2 A car approaches a set of traffic lights. The lights change to red at time t = 0.

Fig. 2.1 shows how the speed of the car changes with time.

24

20
speed
m/s
16

12

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
t/s

Fig. 2.1

(a) The car starts to slow down a short time after the lights change to red.

Determine the time between the lights changing to red and the car starting to slow down.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) (i) State what is meant by uniform acceleration.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State how Fig. 2.1 shows that the deceleration of the car between t = 2 s and t = 7 s is
non-uniform.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) Determine the distance the car travels from the moment the car starts to slow down until it
stops.

distance = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21 [Turn over
 4

3 Fig. 3.1 shows a small brick hanging from a newton meter.

newton meter

brick

Fig. 3.1

The reading on the newton meter is 3.0 N.

(a) Describe how the reading on the newton meter is used to find the mass of the brick.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The same brick and newton meter are used in the apparatus shown in Fig. 3.2. The meter
rule is pivoted at its centre and is balanced. The reading on the newton meter is not shown.

newton meter 0

uniform metre
pivot rule
10 cm 20 cm

Fig. 3.2

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 5

(i) State the principle of moments for a body in equilibrium.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Determine the reading on the newton meter shown in Fig. 3.2.

reading = ......................................................... [2]

(c) A beaker of water is placed so that the brick is partly submerged in the water, as shown in
Fig. 3.3. The apparatus is adjusted to keep the rule horizontal.

newton meter 0

uniform metre
pivot rule
10 cm 20 cm

water

Fig. 3.3

Suggest why the reading on the newton meter is less than your answer in (b)(ii).

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21 [Turn over

 6

4 (a) In a demonstration, a teacher uses a loud ticking clock, two hollow tubes A and B, a barrier
and a smooth surface. The clock is used as a source of sound.

Fig. 4.1 shows tube A and the clock, both fixed in position on the left of the barrier.

smooth surface

hollow tube A

hollow tube B

barrier
ticking clock ear

Fig. 4.1

Sound from the ticking clock passes along tube A and is incident on the smooth surface.

A student listens to the sound passing along tube B, which is on the right of the barrier.

(i) On Fig. 4.1, draw tube B in the position where the sound heard by the student is loudest.
[1]

(ii) Explain your answer to (i).

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.

State a typical value for the speed of sound in a solid.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 4]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 7

Question 5 begins over the page

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21 [Turn over

 8

5 Fig. 5.1 shows a method of producing sandpaper using static electricity.

glue
paper

sand

negative
metal plate

positive metal
plate
sand

Fig. 5.1

Glue is sprayed on to moving paper. The sticky paper then passes between two metal plates.

One of the plates is positive and the other plate is negative.

There is an electric field between the plates.

(a) On Fig. 5.2, draw the electric field between the two metal plates. Show the direction of the
electric field.

negative
metal plate

positive metal
plate

Fig. 5.2
[2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 9

(b) Grains of sand are present just below the sticky paper.

Each grain of sand is a conductor of electricity.

Fig. 5.3 shows two layers of sand grains in the space between the two plates.

negative
metal plate
sand grains
sticky paper

positive metal
plate

Fig. 5.3

(i) Explain, using ideas about the movement of charge, why the top layer of sand becomes
positively charged.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State why the top layer of sand moves towards the sticky paper.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) A student receives an electric shock by walking across a certain type of carpet and then
nearly touching a piece of earthed metal with his hand.

The potential difference between the hand and the metal is 2000 V and the charge transferred
is 4.0 × 10−4 C.

Calculate the energy transferred when the spark jumps across the air gap from the metal
onto his hand.

energy = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21 [Turn over

 10

6 The power input to a filament lamp when connected to a 12 V supply is 20 W.

(a) State what is meant by power.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Calculate:

(i) the current in the filament

current = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) the resistance of the filament.

resistance = ......................................................... [1]

(c) The filament in another lamp is made from thinner wire of the same length and made from the
same material. Both lamps are connected to a 12 V supply.

State and explain how using thinner wire in the filament affects the power input to the lamp.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 11

7 Fig. 7.1 shows part of a simple d.c. electric motor.

coil
axis

A
S
B

Fig. 7.1

The motor is connected to a battery with the positive terminal of the battery connected to terminal A.

(a) Explain why the coil turns in the direction shown.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) The turning effect is increased when the coil is wound around a soft-iron cylinder.

(i) Explain why this happens.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Suggest one other way to increase the turning effect of the motor.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21 [Turn over

 12

8 Fig. 8.1 shows a potential divider circuit containing two resistors R1 and R2.

R1
input
voltage
6.0 V
output
R2 voltage

Fig. 8.1

(a) There is an input voltage of 6.0 V.

Complete Table 8.1 to show the output voltage for different values of the resistances of the
two resistors.

Table 8.1

resistance of R1 / Ω resistance of R2 / Ω output voltage / V

8.0 8.0
..............................

800 1200
..............................
[3]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 13

EITHER

(b) In the circuit shown in Fig. 8.1, resistor R1 is replaced by a light dependent resistor (LDR).

(i) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for an LDR.

[1]

(ii) The LDR is moved from darkness into daylight.

State what happens to the resistance of the LDR and the output voltage.

resistance ..........................................................................................................................

output voltage ....................................................................................................................

[1]

(iii) A potential divider circuit can also be used to produce an output voltage that changes
with temperature.

State the name of the component that is used instead of the LDR.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

OR

(b) A simple bistable circuit contains NOR gates.

(i) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol of a NOR gate.

[1]

(ii) Describe what is meant by a bistable circuit.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21 [Turn over

 14

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

9 (a) Fig. 9.1 represents the conversion of energy in a mobile phone.

energy
output

battery mobile phone

Fig. 9.1

(i) State the form of energy stored in the battery.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State the useful form of output energy from the battery.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) State two useful forms of output energy from the mobile phone.

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) When the battery is in use, the average current is 1.3 mA.

Determine the charge that passes through the battery in a time of 2.0 minutes.

charge = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 15

(c) A student estimates the thermal energy produced in the battery when the mobile phone is
used and uses this value to estimate the efficiency of the battery.

He measures a temperature rise of 5.0 °C within the battery in a period of time when the
useful energy output from the battery is 5200 J.

The mass of the battery is 110 g and its specific heat capacity is 830 J / (kg °C).

(i) Calculate the thermal energy (heat) needed to raise the temperature of the battery by
5.0 °C.

thermal energy = ......................................................... [3]

(ii) State what is meant by efficiency.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Calculate the efficiency of the battery.

efficiency = ......................................................... [2]

(iv) Suggest and explain one reason why the value for the efficiency calculated in (iii) is
larger than the actual efficiency of the battery.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21 [Turn over

 16

10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a water wave moving from shallow into deep water. The wavefronts shown
represent the crests of the wave.

boundary
shallow deep
water water

wavefront

12 cm

Fig. 10.1 (not to scale)

The water wave is made by dipping a wooden bar up and down in the water. The bar makes
10 complete up and down movements in 5.0 s.

(i) Determine the wavelength of the wave in the shallow water.

wavelength = ......................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the frequency of the wave produced.

frequency = ......................................................... [2]

(iii) Determine the speed of the water wave in the shallow water.

speed = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 17

(iv) On Fig. 10.2, draw lines to show what happens to the wavelength, the frequency and the
speed of the water wave as it enters the deep water.

One line has been drawn for you.

wavelength decreases

frequency stays the same

speed increases

Fig. 10.2
[1]

(v) The direction of the boundary is now altered. The water wave now enters the deep water
from the shallow water at an angle, as shown in Fig. 10.3.

boundary
deep
water
deep
water

Fig. 10.3

On Fig. 10.3, draw the wavefronts in the deep water. [3]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21 [Turn over

 18

(b) White light is made up of different colours.

(i) State the name of four of the colours in the visible spectrum and place them in order
from the smallest wavelength to the largest wavelength.

smallest wavelength ............................................

............................................

............................................

largest wavelength ............................................

[2]

(ii) A narrow beam of white light can be split into different colours.

Fig. 10.4 shows rays of white light emitted from a lamp.

Complete Fig. 10.4 to show how a narrow beam is produced from these rays and how a
spectrum is shown on the screen. Label your diagram.

screen

lamp

Fig. 10.4
[4]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 19

11 A highly radioactive source that emits beta-particles is placed a few centimetres away from a
detector, as shown in Fig. 11.1.

radioactive
source detector counter Not to scale

metal
casing 000000

Fig. 11.1

(a) State the name of the particle which has the same mass and charge as a beta-particle.

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) State and explain why the metal casing in Fig. 11.1 is used.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(c) State and explain what happens to the number of particles detected in a minute as the
radioactive source is moved:

(i) a few centimetres further away from the source

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) more than a metre away from the source.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21 [Turn over

 20

(d) A nucleus of strontium-90 (Sr-90) decays by beta emission to a nucleus of yttrium (Y).

Complete the decay equation for this decay.

90 ...... ......
38 Sr → ...... Y + –1 β
[3]

(e) Nuclear fusion and nuclear fission both release large amounts of energy.

(i) Describe how the process of nuclear fusion differs from the process of nuclear fission.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Describe the conditions needed for nuclear fusion to take place.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2021 5054/22/M/J/21

 Cambridge O Level
* 0 1 9 0 1 6 6 0 4 8 *

PHYSICS 5054/21
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (NF/CB) 182474/3
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
 2

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 3

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 Fig. 1.1 shows the thinking distance and the braking distance for a car being driven along a dry
road and along a wet road at the same speed.

thinking distance braking distance

dry road 18 m 43 m

wet road 18 m 60 m

Fig. 1.1

(a) Calculate the total stopping distance for the car on the wet road.

distance = ......................................................... [1]

(b) Complete the sentence.

The thinking distance is the distance travelled between seeing a hazard and .........................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) (i) Suggest why the thinking distance is the same on both roads.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why the braking distance is larger when the road is wet.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20 [Turn over

 4

2 A student performs an experiment to mark the centre of mass C on a thin piece of card. There are
two holes in the card.

Fig. 2.1 shows the card and two lines that the student draws on the card.

key
= hole
C = centre of mass
C

Fig. 2.1

(a) Describe a method used to draw these two lines in their correct positions on the card.

Make clear what extra apparatus is needed. You may draw a diagram, if you wish.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 5

(b) The student holds the card loosely between her fingers. The card is vertical, resting with its
lower edge on a bench as shown in Fig. 2.2.

Fig. 2.2

The card is tilted slightly, as shown in Fig. 2.3, and then released.

C
anticlockwise clockwise

Fig. 2.3

When angle θ is small, the card falls clockwise, back to the position shown in Fig. 2.2.

(i) Explain why the card falls anticlockwise when θ is large.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State one change to the card that makes it more stable.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20 [Turn over

 6

3 A student suspends a spring from a support. He attaches different loads to the lower end of the
spring. For each load attached, he measures the extension of the spring.

Fig. 3.1 shows the extension–load graph obtained.

6.0

5.0
extension / cm
4.0

3.0

2.0

1.0

0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
load / N

Fig. 3.1

(a) The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the load.

State the two features of the graph that show this.

1. ...............................................................................................................................................

2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]

(b) Describe how the student can show that the spring reaches its limit of proportionality at 8.0 N.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 7

(c) The spring is used in a simple device known as an accelerometer, shown in Fig. 3.2.

5.0 kg
spring
mass
direction of the
smooth acceleration
surface

Fig. 3.2

The spring is fixed at one end and attached to a mass of 5.0 kg at the other end.

The mass rests on a smooth, horizontal surface. There is no friction between the mass and
the surface.

The whole device is placed in a car.

The car accelerates and the student notices that the extension of the spring is 3.0 cm.

Using Fig. 3.1, calculate the acceleration of the car.

acceleration = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20 [Turn over

 8

4 Glass and iron are both conductors of heat. However, glass is a poor conductor of heat and iron is
a good conductor of heat.

(a) Describe, using ideas about particles, how the conduction of heat takes place in glass and in
iron. You should make it clear why iron is a better conductor of heat.

conduction in glass ...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

conduction in iron .....................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[4]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 9

(b) Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus used to show expansion.

glass tube

X liquid level

glass flask water

heat

Fig. 4.1

The glass flask, full of water, is heated. A student is surprised when the liquid level X in the
glass tube falls for a few seconds before it rises.

(i) Suggest why the liquid level falls and why it then rises.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Describe how heat is transferred throughout the water in the glass flask.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20 [Turn over

 10

5 (a) Use the relationship between pressure, force and area to explain why it is harder to cut
something with a blunt knife than with a sharp knife.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Experimental measurements on gas pressures were made by Robert Boyle.

He showed that p1V1 = p2V2 where p1 and p2 are the initial and final pressures of a gas, and
V1 and V2 are the initial and final volumes of the gas.

(i) State two quantities that must remain constant when this equation is used.

1. .......................................................................................................................................

2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]

(ii) Fig. 5.1 shows the molecules of a gas as the volume of the gas is halved.

Fig. 5.1 (not to scale)

The equation suggests that when the volume of a gas halves the pressure doubles.

Using ideas about molecules, explain why this happens.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 11

6 A dentist uses a plane mirror to see the back of a tooth.

(a) A plane mirror produces an image of an object.

Describe the position of this image.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Fig. 6.1 shows the plane mirror used by the dentist to see the point labelled X on the tooth.

dentist’s eye

mirror

Fig. 6.1

On Fig. 6.1:

(i) mark the position of the image of X formed by the mirror [1]
(ii) draw a ray of light from X to show how the dentist can see the tooth. [2]

(c) State one characteristic of the image formed by the plane mirror other than its position.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20 [Turn over

 12

7 Two isotopes of carbon are carbon-12 and carbon-14.

One of these isotopes, carbon-14, undergoes radioactive decay.

(a) Describe what is meant by radioactive decay.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Carbon-12 has a proton number (atomic number) of 6 and a nucleon number (mass number)
of 12.

Complete Table 7.1 for a neutral atom of each of these two isotopes.

Table 7.1

carbon-12 carbon-14

number of protons 6

number of neutrons

number of electrons

[2]

(c) A sample of carbon-14 is contained in a thin aluminium container of thickness 0.2 mm.

Radiation from the sample is detected outside the container.

When the thickness of the aluminium is increased to 6 mm, no radiation from the sample is
detected outside the container.

(i) State the type of radiation which is stopped by increasing the thickness of the aluminium.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain how you know that the sample does not emit one other type of radiation.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 13

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

8 Fig. 8.1 shows a lamp from a car. It contains two metal filaments.

filament 1

filament 2

Fig. 8.1

(a) (i) Complete the boxes to describe the transfer of energy that takes place when the lamp is
switched on.

........................ energy .................................. and .................................. energy

[3]

(ii) The efficiency of the metal filament lamp is less than 10%.

State what is meant by efficiency.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(b) The two filaments are usually connected in parallel to a car battery.

A student investigates what happens when the filaments are connected in series, rather than
in parallel. He uses the same battery for the investigation.

State whether the current, the voltage across each filament and the total power produced
increases, decreases or stays the same when the two filaments are connected in series.

current ...............................................................................................

voltage ...............................................................................................

power ................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20 [Turn over

 14

(c) Fig. 8.2 shows the current–voltage graph for the two filaments.

2.0

current / A

1.5

1.0

0.5

0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
voltage / V

Fig. 8.2

(i) Calculate the total resistance of the two filaments when they are connected in parallel to
a voltage of 12 V.

resistance = ......................................................... [3]

(ii) The two filaments are made from the same type of metal and have the same length,
when uncoiled. They both operate at the same temperature.

Suggest why one filament has a resistance that is greater than that of the other filament.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 15

(d) Fig. 8.3 shows a relay used to switch on a car headlamp.

pivot
iron core

iron armature
coil of high resistance

flexible contacts relay

Fig. 8.3

Explain why headlamp H lights up when switch S is closed.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20 [Turn over

 16

9 Ultrasound and X-rays are both used in medical imaging.

(a) (i) Define what is meant by ultrasound.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Describe what happens to ultrasound waves as they meet the boundary between two
different materials.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) To produce the image of an unborn child, an ultrasound emitter and receiver are placed
close together on the mother’s skin.

Fig. 9.1 shows pulses detected by the receiver.

0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08

time / ms

Fig. 9.1

Pulse A is the emitted pulse and pulse B is the first pulse that returns from the unborn child.

The average speed of ultrasound in human tissue is 1500 m / s.

Calculate the distance between the emitter and the child.

distance = ......................................................... [3]

(iv) The speed of ultrasound in human tissue is close to the speed of sound in water.

Suggest approximate values for the speed of sound in gases and solids.

speed in gases ..................................................................................................................

speed in solids ..................................................................................................................

[2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 17

(b) Fig. 9.2 shows an X-ray image of a hand. An X-ray detector is placed just below the hand.
An image of the bones and human tissue around the bones is formed on a screen by the
detector.

screen

Fig. 9.2

(i) Describe what happens to the X-rays to produce the image.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) The wavelength of the X-rays used is 2.0 × 10−9 m. The speed of electromagnetic waves
is 3.0 × 108 m / s.

Calculate the frequency of the X-rays.

frequency = ......................................................... [2]

(iii) Suggest one reason why X-rays are not used to form an image of an unborn child.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20 [Turn over
 18

10 Fig. 10.1 shows a motor lifting a mass. Fig. 10.2 shows part of the circuit diagram of the connections
to the motor.

motor
switch motor
M
mass

Fig. 10.1 Fig. 10.2

(a) The current in the motor is 1.5 A and the voltage supplied by the battery is 8.0 V.

(i) Complete the circuit diagram in Fig. 10.2 to show an ammeter and a voltmeter in the
correct positions to take these measurements while the motor is working. [2]
(ii) The motor takes 4.0 s to lift the mass.

Calculate the electrical energy transferred to the motor in this time.

energy = ......................................................... [2]

(iii) The motor lifts the 150 g mass through a height of 80 cm in the 4.0 s.

Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the mass.

The gravitational field strength g = 10 N / kg.

gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [3]

(iv) State two reasons why the gravitational potential energy gained by the mass is less than
the electrical energy supplied to the motor.

1. .......................................................................................................................................

2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 19

(b) Fig. 10.3 shows the structure of the motor.

When the mass reaches the top of its motion, the switch is opened. This disconnects the
battery and causes the mass to fall. The coil turns as the mass falls.

N
axle
coil

S
A

Fig. 10.3

As the coil turns, a small voltage is produced.

(i) Explain why a voltage is produced as the coil turns.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) As the mass falls, a student connects a wire between the points A and B shown in
Fig. 10.3.

He notices that the mass takes a longer time to fall when the wire is connected.

The student suggests that this is an example of Lenz’s law.

State Lenz’s law and suggest why the mass takes longer to fall.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/M/J/20

 Cambridge O Level
* 0 3 2 5 8 5 8 2 1 8 *

PHYSICS 5054/22
Paper 2 Theory May/June 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (NF/CB) 182473/4
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 Fig. 1.1 shows part of the speed–time graph for an athlete in a race.

14.0

speed
12.0
m/s
10.0

8.0

6.0

4.0

2.0

0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0
time / s

Fig. 1.1

(a) During the race, the acceleration of the athlete is uniform in the first 2.0 s.

State how the graph shows that the acceleration is uniform.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Determine the distance travelled by the athlete in the first 2.0 s.

distance = ......................................................... [2]

(c) During the rest of the race:

• from 2.0 s to 5.5 s, the acceleration of the athlete decreases
• at 5.5 s, the athlete reaches a maximum speed of 12 m / s
• from 5.5 s to 8.0 s, the athlete travels at a speed of 12 m / s
• from 8.0 s to 11.0 s, the athlete decelerates, finishing the race at a speed of 10 m / s.

On Fig. 1.1, complete the speed–time graph for times between 2.0 and 11.0 s. [3]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 3

2 Fig. 2.1 shows the thinking distance and the braking distance for a car driven at 100 km / h.

The car has old, smooth tyres.

thinking braking
distance distance

21 m 75 m

Fig. 2.1

(a) Calculate the total stopping distance for the car.

stopping distance = ......................................................... [1]

(b) The car is now fitted with new tyres.

At a speed greater than 100 km / h, the total stopping distance is the same as in (a).

(i) State and explain the effect that the increase in speed and the use of new tyres have on
the thinking distance.

effect ..................................................................................................................................

explanation ........................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State and explain the effect that the increase in speed and the new tyres have on the
braking distance.

effect ..................................................................................................................................

explanation ........................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20 [Turn over

 4

3 Fig. 3.1 shows part of a hydraulic press that is used to compress waste paper into a brick for
burning.

handle
pivot
waste
paper
20 N
force piston Q
piston P
oil

Fig. 3.1

A force of 20 N is exerted downwards on the end of the handle.

(a) The force on the handle creates a moment about the pivot.

(i) Define the moment of a force.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain why the force exerted on piston P is greater than the force exerted on the handle.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Explain how the hydraulic press enables a greater force to be exerted on piston Q than is
exerted on piston P.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 5

(c) In moving the handle downwards, the 20 N force moves through a distance of 0.60 m and
piston Q rises by 0.020 m.

The force exerted by piston Q on the paper is 400 N.

Calculate:

(i) the work done in moving the handle downwards

work = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) the efficiency of the hydraulic press.

efficiency = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20 [Turn over

 6

4 (a) Two mirrors, A and B, are inclined at an angle of 60° to each other.

Light strikes mirror A at an angle of 30°, as shown in Fig. 4.1.

mirror B
ray of light

30° 60°

mirror A

Fig. 4.1

(i) Determine the angle of incidence at mirror A.

angle of incidence at A = ......................................................... [1]

(ii) Determine the angle of incidence at mirror B.

angle of incidence at B = ......................................................... [1]

(iii) Describe the path of the reflected ray after it leaves mirror B.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) A plane mirror hanging on a wall is used to form the image of an object.

State three characteristics of the image formed.

1. ...............................................................................................................................................

2. ...............................................................................................................................................

3. ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 7

5 The components of the electromagnetic spectrum have different uses.

Microwaves are used in cooking and ultraviolet rays are used in sterilisation.

(a) Draw one line from each component of the spectrum to another suitable use for that
component.

component use

sunbeds

microwaves
television
controller

satellite television
ultraviolet
airport security
check of cases
[2]

(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a microwave oven used to heat soup. The container for the soup is a glass
bowl.

Microwaves created inside the oven are reflected by the metal walls.

glass bowl

soup

Fig. 5.1

(i) Explain why the choice of material for the container is important in microwave cooking.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20 [Turn over

 8

(ii) The soup is mostly water.

Microwaves are completely absorbed by a few centimetres of water.

As a result, microwaves do not reach the centre of the soup.

The instructions suggest that, after the microwave oven is turned off, the soup:
• is not stirred
• is left for some minutes so that the centre becomes hot.

State the name of and describe each of the two processes by which thermal energy
transfers throughout the soup after the microwave oven is turned off.

name of first process .........................................................................................................

description .........................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

name of second process ....................................................................................................

description .........................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 9

6 The clothes iron shown in Fig. 6.1 is connected to the electrical mains.

iron

cable

Fig. 6.1

(a) The boxes in the left column below contain some electrical hazards. The boxes in the right
column contain methods of protection from these hazards.

For each hazard, draw one line to the appropriate method of protection.

electrical hazard method of protection

worn insulation on the cable earth wire and fuse in plug

to the iron correctly connected to iron

loose live wire in the iron circuit breaker correctly

touches its metal case connected in circuit

cable becomes too hot visual check of cable before

because current is too high connecting to mains
[2]

(b) The power of the iron is 1200 W. The cost of 1 kW h of electrical energy is 20 cents (20 c).

(i) Define the kilowatt-hour (kW h).

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) The iron is on at full power for 20 minutes.

Calculate the cost of running the iron for this time.

cost = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20 [Turn over
 10

7 Radon-222 is an isotope of radon which undergoes a series of radioactive decays.

Fig. 7.1 is a diagram showing the proton number (atomic number) and nucleon number (mass
number) of nuclei involved in the series of decays.

The point P represents a nucleus of radon-222.

Starting at P, a nucleus of radon-222 decays to Q; then from Q to R; then from R to S; then from
S to T; and finally from T to U.

86 P
proton
number
T
84
Q
S

82
U R

210 212 214 216 218 220 222

nucleon number

Fig. 7.1

(a) (i) State two points on Fig. 7.1 which represent isotopes of the same element.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Different isotopes of the same element have different atomic compositions.

State how the composition of their atoms is different.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) A nucleus of radon-222 emits an alpha-particle as it decays.

(i) The radioactive decay of a single nucleus is random.

Explain what is meant by the random radioactive decay of a nucleus.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 11

(ii) In nuclide notation, radon-222 is written as 222Rn.

86

When a nucleus of radon-222 emits an alpha-particle (α), it decays to an isotope of

polonium (Po).

Complete the decay equation below for this decay.

222
86
Rn → ......
......
Po + ......
......
α
[2]

(c) (i) State the name of the particle emitted as a nucleus of R decays to a nucleus of S.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Describe the change in the composition of a nucleus of R as it decays to a nucleus of S.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20 [Turn over

 12

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

8 Fig. 8.1 shows the circuit diagram of a temperature gauge. It contains an ammeter, a thermistor, a
fixed resistor R and a battery.

thermistor R

Fig. 8.1

The current is measured at different temperatures and a graph of the results is shown in Fig. 8.2.

0.025

0.020
current / A
0.015

0.010

0.005

0
20 40 60 80 100
temperature / °C

Fig. 8.2

(a) (i) State how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature and explain how
Fig. 8.2 shows this change.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 13

(ii) Resistance and current are used for the measurement of temperature.

State one other physical property that is used for the measurement of temperature.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) A temperature scale involves the use of fixed points.

State what is meant by:

(i) the ice point

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) the steam point.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) At 80 °C, the potential difference (p.d.) across the thermistor is 3.6 V.

(i) State what is meant by potential difference.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the resistance of the thermistor when the temperature is 80 °C.

resistance = ......................................................... [3]

(iii) The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is 25 V.

Calculate the resistance of the resistor R.

resistance = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20 [Turn over
 14

(d) The current scale on the ammeter is linear.

Using values from Fig. 8.2, a student marks the scale on the ammeter with temperature
values that correspond to the values of the current.

The temperature is then read directly from the temperature scale on the ammeter.

(i) State what is meant by a sensitive thermometer.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State and explain at which temperatures this thermometer is most sensitive.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(e) The temperature gauge is used to measure the temperature of a room.

Suggest why the temperature obtained using the gauge is slightly higher than the actual
temperature of the room.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 15

9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a simple relay used to switch a mains electric motor on and off.

motor
springy metal
M
contacts
mains

pivot
insulator
iron armature
coil of wire

core

Fig. 9.1

(i) Explain why the motor switches on when switch S is closed.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Explain why the core is made of iron rather than steel.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) A student suggests that the motor can be turned on and off without a relay.

He suggests connecting the mains to a simple switch in series with the motor.

Suggest one reason why, in some situations, using the relay is better.

..........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20 [Turn over

 16

(b) Fig. 9.2 shows the coil of wire wrapped around a cardboard tube. There is no core.

There is an electric current in the wire in the direction shown by the arrows.

cardboard
tube

coil of
wire

Fig. 9.2

(i) On Fig. 9.2, draw the pattern of the magnetic field inside and around the coil. Mark the
direction of this magnetic field. [4]

(ii) On Fig. 9.2, mark the N-pole of the coil. [1]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 17

(c) The supply of current to the coil is removed.

The ends of the coil are connected to a sensitive ammeter, as shown in Fig. 9.3.

Fig. 9.3

(i) Describe how a permanent magnet is used to produce a large reading on the ammeter.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain why a current is produced in (i).

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20 [Turn over

 18

10 An oscilloscope is a device used to display waveforms.

(a) Inside the oscilloscope, a beam of electrons is emitted from a metal filament by thermionic
emission.

The emitted electrons are accelerated away from the filament by a potential difference of
2000 V.

(i) State what must happen to the metal filament for thermionic emission to occur.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why the electrons accelerate away from the filament.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(iii) The charge on one electron is 1.6 × 10−19 C.

Calculate the maximum kinetic energy of one electron after it has been accelerated
through 2000 V.

kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]

(b) Fig. 10.1 is the trace on the screen of the oscilloscope.

1 division

1 division

Fig. 10.1

The settings on the oscilloscope are 10 ms / division for the x-axis and 3.0 V / division for the
y-axis.

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 19

(i) Calculate the amplitude of the trace shown in Fig. 10.1.

amplitude = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) Calculate the time for one oscillation (complete wavelength) of the trace shown in
Fig. 10.1.

time = ......................................................... [1]

(c) The trace shown in Fig. 10.1 is caused by a sound.

The sound travels through the air to a microphone from the place that it is made. The
microphone is connected to the oscilloscope which displays the waveform shown.

(i) Sound is a type of wave.

State which type.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Describe the motion of the air molecules as the sound passes through the air to the
microphone.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(iii) Describe and explain how the trace on the screen changes as the pitch of the sound
becomes higher. The settings on the oscilloscope are unchanged.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20 [Turn over

 20

(d) A student investigates what happens when a diode is connected between the microphone
and the oscilloscope.

Fig. 10.2 shows the circuit that he uses.

diode

output from
microphone oscilloscope

Fig. 10.2

Without the diode, the output from the microphone is an alternating current and the trace is as
shown in Fig. 10.1 on page 18.

(i) Describe the action of the diode on the current from the microphone.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) On the grid in Fig. 10.3, sketch the trace seen on the screen when the diode is used.

Fig. 10.3
[2]

[Total: 15]

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/M/J/20

 Cambridge O Level
* 4 0 9 7 2 6 3 5 8 2 *

PHYSICS 5054/21
Paper 2 Theory October/November 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (CJ/SG) 193464/3
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 Fig. 1.1 is the distance–time graph for a skydiver who jumps from a balloon at time t = 0.

2500

2000
distance / m
1500

1000

500

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
time / s

Fig. 1.1

(a) The first part of the graph shows the motion of the skydiver from when he jumps until he
reaches terminal velocity.

(i) Describe the motion of the skydiver between t = 0 and t = 20 s.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Explain the motion of the skydiver between t = 0 and t = 20 s in terms of the forces acting
on him.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(b) Using Fig. 1.1, determine the terminal velocity of the skydiver.

On Fig. 1.1, indicate any values used for your calculation.

terminal velocity = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 8]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 3

2 Fig. 2.1 shows a satellite moving at a constant speed in a circular orbit around the Earth.

satellite

orbit

Fig. 2.1 (not to scale)

Speed is a scalar quantity but velocity is a vector quantity.

(a) State how a scalar quantity differs from a vector quantity.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) Underline every vector quantity in the list.

distance displacement force length mass time

[1]

(c) There is a resultant force acting on the satellite in Fig. 2.1.

(i) Explain how the motion of the satellite shows that a resultant force is acting on it.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State the cause of this force.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 5]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20 [Turn over

 4

3 Fig. 3.1 shows a door and an automatic door-closer viewed from above.

point X

0.72 m P

door

bar
door closer

hinge
F
bar fixed to wall

Fig. 3.1

When the door opens and closes, the hinge acts as a pivot.

A girl opens the door by exerting a force P at point X.

Force P is perpendicular to the surface of the door.

(a) Fig. 3.1 shows that point X is a distance of 0.72 m along the front of the door from the hinge.
The force P is 25 N.

(i) Calculate the moment of force P about the hinge.

moment of force = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) The door rotates about the hinge by 90°. The circumference of a circle of radius 0.72 m is
4.5 m.

Calculate the work done on the door by force P.

work done = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 5

(b) As the door opens, there is a force F on the door in the direction shown in Fig. 3.1.

Although force F is larger than force P, the door rotates about the hinge.

Explain why.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20 [Turn over

 6

4 The three angles of a glass prism are 45°, 45° and 90° as shown in Fig. 4.1.

45°

45°

Fig. 4.1

At point Y, a ray of light of a single frequency travels in air and strikes the side of the prism at 90°.
The ray passes into the glass prism.

(a) Light travels more slowly in glass than in air.

(i) State what happens to the wavelength of the light in the ray as it enters the glass.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State what happens to the frequency of the light in the ray as it enters the glass.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The refractive index of glass is 1.6.

(i) Calculate the critical angle for light in glass.

critical angle = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) On Fig. 4.1, sketch the path of the light after it strikes the side of the prism at Z and after
it returns to the air. [2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 7

5 Fig. 5.1 shows some parts of a thermocouple thermometer that is being used to determine the
temperature of a liquid.

output

X Z

ice and water

Y
mixture

liquid

Fig. 5.1

(a) Suggest an appropriate material for:

• X ........................................................................................................................................

• Y ........................................................................................................................................

• Z. .......................................................................................................................................
[1]

(b) All types of thermometer require the measurement of a physical property that varies with
temperature in order to obtain a value for the temperature.

(i) State the physical property of a thermocouple thermometer that is used in this way.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Discuss what is meant by the term linearity when applied to a thermocouple thermometer.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(c) State two advantages of a thermocouple thermometer over a liquid-in-glass thermometer.

1. . ..............................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2. ...............................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 6]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20 [Turn over

 8

6 When electricity is transmitted over large distances, a transformer is used to increase the voltage
before transmission. A second transformer is used at the destination to decrease the voltage to
the usual mains value.

(a) Sketch a labelled diagram to show the structure of a transformer that is used to increase
voltage.

[2]

(b) Describe the principle of operation of a transformer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(c) Explain one advantage of transmitting electricity at a high voltage.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 9

7 Nuclear fusion is a reaction that occurs in the Sun and other stars.

(a) Explain what is meant by nuclear fusion.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

(b) Describe the nuclear fusion reaction that takes place in the Sun.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(c) A star forms when the temperature of a large cloud of gas in space increases as the cloud
collapses inwards.

(i) State the energy transfers that occur as the cloud collapses.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The temperature increase starts a nuclear fusion reaction.

Explain why the temperature of the star eventually reaches a steady value.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20 [Turn over

 10

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

8 The density of water in a lake is 1000 kg / m3.

At a depth of 25 m beneath the surface of the lake, the total pressure is 3.5 × 105 Pa.

(a) State what is meant by pressure.

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [1]

(b) The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.

Determine:

(i) the pressure due to 25 m of water

pressure = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) the atmospheric pressure.

atmospheric pressure = ......................................................... [1]

(c) An underwater depth gauge contains a small cylinder as shown in Fig. 8.1. Gas is trapped
inside the cylinder by a piston. The piston is free to move.

gas

outer face of piston

piston

Fig. 8.1

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 11

The outer face of the piston is in contact with the water.

As the depth gauge is lowered into the water, the piston moves into the cylinder. This moves
a needle on a dial to indicate the depth of the gauge in the water.

(i) Explain why the piston moves into the cylinder.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) The temperature of the gas does not change as the piston moves into the cylinder.

Explain, in terms of molecules, what happens to the pressure of the trapped gas as the
piston moves into the cylinder.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(iii) At the surface of the water, the volume of the trapped gas in the depth gauge is V0.

On Fig. 8.2, sketch a graph to show how the volume of trapped gas decreases as the
gauge is lowered into the water.

V0

volume

0
0
depth

Fig. 8.2
[2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20 [Turn over

 12

(iv) The instructions for the depth gauge state that, each time it is used, the needle of the dial
must be re-set to zero at the surface of the water.

Suggest one reason for this.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(v) The density of the air trapped in the depth gauge increases. The density of the water
remains constant.

Explain, in terms of the molecules of the water, why the density of the water remains
constant.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 13

BLANK PAGE

Question 9 starts over the page

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20 [Turn over

 14

9 A small glass measuring cylinder of oil is placed inside a freezer where the temperature is –18 °C.
Fig. 9.1 shows how the temperature of the oil varies with time t.

20

temperature / °C

10

0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10 000 12 000 14 000
t/s

–10

–20
Fig. 9.1

Fig. 9.1 shows that it takes 700 s for the temperature to decrease from 20 °C to 10 °C but that it
takes 1900 s to decrease from 0 °C to –10 °C.

(a) Suggest why these times are different.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Explain what happens to the molecules of the oil and what happens to the level of the oil in
the glass measuring cylinder as the temperature decreases from 20 °C to 0 °C.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 15

(c) (i) Determine the melting point of the oil.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain, in terms of molecules, why the temperature of the oil does not change between
t = 3600 s and t = 10 800 s.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(d) There is 45 g of oil in the glass measuring cylinder and the specific latent heat of fusion
(melting) of the oil is 5.7 × 104 J / kg.

Calculate:

(i) the energy transferred from the oil between t = 3600 s and t = 10 800 s

energy = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) the average rate at which energy is transferred from the oil between t = 3600 s and
t = 10 800 s.

rate = ......................................................... [1]

(e) The graph in Fig. 9.1 is steeper before the horizontal section than it is after.

Use this observation to compare the specific heat capacity of oil in the liquid and solid states
and explain your reasoning.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20 [Turn over

 16

BLANK PAGE

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 17

10 Fig. 10.1 shows a wire of length l and cross-sectional area A.

Fig. 10.1

(a) State how the resistance of the wire in Fig. 10.1 depends on:

(i) l

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) A.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The cross-sectional area of a piece of metal wire is 7.5 × 10–4 cm2. The resistance of a 1.0 m
length of the same wire is 6.4 Ω.

The wire is made from metal W.

Fig. 10.2 shows a solid cube of side 1.0 cm. It is also made from metal W.

B
A

1.0 cm
1.0 cm
1.0 cm

Fig. 10.2

Calculate the resistance between the two opposite faces A and B of the cube.

resistance = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20 [Turn over

 18

(c) The wire in part (b) is taped to a metre rule.

Fig. 10.3 shows that a 1.0 m length of the wire (resistance 6.4 Ω) is connected in series with a
switch, a cell of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.2 V and a resistor of resistance 9.6 Ω.

1.2 V
9.6 Ω

0 cm
wire

Fig. 10.3

The switch is closed.

(i) Explain what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the 1.0 m length of the wire.

p.d. = ......................................................... [3]

(iii) One input terminal of an oscilloscope is connected to the wire at point P, the 0 cm mark
of the metre rule.

The other terminal of the oscilloscope is connected to a sliding contact. Initially, this
contact touches the wire at point P.

The Y-gain setting on the oscilloscope is 0.20 V / cm.

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 19

Fig. 10.4 shows the screen of the oscilloscope with a horizontal trace across the middle
of the screen.

trace

1.0 cm

1.0 cm

Fig. 10.4

The sliding contact is slowly moved along the wire until it reaches the other end of the
metre rule.

Describe and explain what happens to the trace on the screen.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(d) A second, identical 1.2 V cell is connected in parallel with the cell in the circuit in Fig. 10.3.

(i) State one advantage of using two cells in parallel rather than a single cell.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) State and explain the effect on the trace in (c)(iii) of adding the second cell in parallel.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20
 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 5054/21/O/N/20

 Cambridge O Level
* 7 6 4 4 8 9 3 2 0 3 *

PHYSICS 5054/22
Paper 2 Theory October/November 2020

1 hour 45 minutes

You must answer on the question paper.

No additional materials are needed.

INSTRUCTIONS
● Section A: answer all questions.
● Section B: answer two questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.

INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 75.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].

This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.

DC (CJ/SG) 217100/3
© UCLES 2020 [Turn over
 2

Section A

Answer all the questions in this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

1 A glass beaker has a mass of 50 g. A liquid of density 1.8 g / cm3 is poured into the beaker until it
reaches the 200 cm3 mark.

(a) Calculate the total mass of the beaker and its contents.

mass = ......................................................... [3]

(b) The centre of mass of a metre rule is at the 50 cm mark.

(i) State what is meant by centre of mass.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

 3

(ii) The metre rule is placed on a pivot. The tip of the pivot is under the 80 cm mark on the
rule.

The beaker with its contents is then placed at different positions along the rule until the
rule is balanced.

Fig. 1.1 shows the arrangement with the rule balanced.

50 cm 80 cm beaker
mark mark
metre rule

centre of mass of rule pivot

84 cm 92 cm
mark mark

Fig. 1.1

One side of the beaker is at the 84 cm mark and the other side is at the 92 cm mark.

Calculate the mass of the rule.

mass = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20 [Turn over

 4

2 The total mass of a wheelbarrow and its load is 90 kg. A worker pushes the wheelbarrow and load
up a plank of length 2.0 m on to a platform, as shown in Fig. 2.1. The platform is at a height of
0.60 m above the ground.

290 N load

platform

2.0 m

0.60 m

Fig. 2.1

The worker exerts a force of 290 N on the wheelbarrow in the direction in which the wheelbarrow
moves.

(a) The gravitational field strength g is equal to 10 N / kg.

(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the wheelbarrow and its load.

energy = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) The worker pushes the wheelbarrow 2.0 m along the plank.

Calculate the work done on the wheelbarrow by the worker.

work done = ......................................................... [2]

(iii) Suggest one reason why the answer to (a)(ii) is not equal to the answer to (a)(i).

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

 5

(b) The worker finds that walking up the plank pushing the wheelbarrow is even more inefficient
than the answers in (a) suggest.

(i) State what is meant by efficiency.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Suggest one reason why this method of lifting the load onto the platform is so inefficient.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20 [Turn over

 6

3 Fig. 3.1 shows a hot water tank that contains two electric heaters X and Y.

hot water out

X
insulation

Y
cold water in

Fig. 3.1

Heater X is used during the daytime but heater Y is only used at night when electricity is cheaper.

(a) The tank is full of cold water and X is switched on.

The temperature of all the water above X increases very quickly but the temperature of the
water below X increases much more slowly.

(i) Explain the process that causes the water above X to increase in temperature.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [3]

(ii) Heater Y remains switched off. Explain why the temperature of the water below heater X
increases much more slowly than the temperature of the water above heater X.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

 7

(b) The hot water tank is covered in a thick layer of insulating material. The material is a plastic
that contains a large number of small pockets of trapped air.

Explain why this material is a good insulator.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20 [Turn over

 8

4 (a) Describe, in terms of molecules, the structure of a solid.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a metal-worker heating a horseshoe to a high temperature before shaping it.

metal-worker

horseshoe

Fig. 4.1

The metal-worker then cools the horseshoe by dropping it into 8.0 kg of water at 18 °C. The
final temperature of the water is 43 °C.

The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).

(i) Calculate the thermal energy transferred to the water as the horseshoe cools.

energy = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) The heat capacity of the horseshoe is 850 J / °C.

Calculate the temperature of the horseshoe immediately before it is dropped into the water.

temperature = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20
 9

5 The cable of a washing machine contains three separate wires. There is a fuse in one of the wires.

(a) Explain how the earth wire and the fuse work together to make the washing machine safer.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

(b) (i) State the name of the wire in which the fuse is connected.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Explain why the fuse is connected into this wire.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(c) The cable of a hair-dryer contains only two wires.

(i) State the name of each of these wires.

1. .......................................................................................................................................

2. .......................................................................................................................................
[1]

(ii) Suggest why the hair-dryer does not need an earth wire.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

[Total: 7]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20 [Turn over

 10

6 Phosphorus-32 (32
15 P) is an isotope of phosphorus that undergoes radioactive decay.

(a) The most common isotope of phosphorus is phosphorus-31.

(i) Describe the structure and composition of a neutral atom of phosphorus-31.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) State how an atom of phosphorus-32 differs from an atom of phosphorus-31.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) Phosphorus-32 decays by beta-particle emission to a stable isotope of sulfur. The half-life for
this decay is 2.0 weeks.

(i) State how a nucleus of this isotope of sulfur is different to a nucleus of phosphorus-32.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) At time t = 0, a radioactive sample contains 3.2 × 1011 atoms of phosphorus-32.

At the same moment, the sample contains no atoms of sulfur. This is shown by the cross
on Fig. 6.1.

On Fig. 6.1, plot a graph to show how the total number of sulfur atoms in the sample
changes with t and draw a suitable curve. [3]

4.0 × 1011
number of
sulfur atoms 3.0 × 1011

2.0 × 1011

1.0 × 1011

0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
t / weeks

Fig. 6.1

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

 11

(c) State two precautions taken when storing or moving radioactive materials.

1. ...............................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

2. ...............................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

[Total: 9]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20 [Turn over

 12

Section B

Answer two questions from this section. Answer in the spaces provided.

7 A bus leaves a bus-stop at time t = 0 and travels along a horizontal road until it reaches a second
bus-stop. Fig. 7.1 is the distance-time graph for the bus between t = 0 and t = 60 s.

400

distance / m

300

200

100

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / s

Fig. 7.1

The road on which the bus is travelling is straight except for a short, curved section. The bus
travels around this circular curve between t = 21 s and t = 24 s.

(a) Describe how the motion of the bus between t = 0 and t = 10 s differs from its motion between
t = 35 s and t = 40 s.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

 13

(b) Determine:

(i) the maximum speed of the bus during these 60 s

maximum speed = ......................................................... [3]

(ii) the average speed of the bus between leaving the first bus-stop and arriving at the
second bus-stop.

average speed = ......................................................... [2]

(c) (i) State how velocity differs from speed.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) There are three periods during the 60 s when there is a non-zero resultant force acting
on the bus.

Complete the statements to indicate these three time periods and state the direction of
the resultant force in that period.

1. Between t = ............... and t = ............... the direction of the resultant force is

........................................................................................................................................

2. Between t = ............... and t = ............... the direction of the resultant force is

........................................................................................................................................

3. Between t = ............... and t = ............... the direction of the resultant force is

........................................................................................................................................
[4]

(d) During the journey, the air resistance acting on the bus varies.

(i) State why the air resistance changes during the journey.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) On Fig. 7.1, mark and label with an M a time when the air resistance is a maximum value.
[1]

[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20 [Turn over
 14

8 A thin converging lens is made of a transparent material of refractive index 1.4.

(a) A ray of light travelling in air strikes the surface of the lens at an angle of incidence of 55°.

(i) Calculate the angle of refraction.

angle of refraction = ......................................................... [2]

(ii) Place a tick (3) in one of the boxes in the third column of Table 8.1 to indicate how the
light ray deviates and what happens to the speed of the light in the ray as it enters the
lens.

Table 8.1

direction of deviation speed of light

away from the normal decreases
away from the normal does not change
away from the normal increases
towards the normal decreases
towards the normal does not change
towards the normal increases
[1]

(iii) State what happens to the frequency of the light in the ray as it enters the glass.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

(b) The focal length of the lens is 2.5 cm.

(i) State what is meant by focal length.

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [1]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

 15

(ii) Fig. 8.1 is a full-scale diagram that shows an object O of height 3.0 cm and the lens.

principal axis

1.0 cm

1.0 cm

lens

Fig. 8.1 (full scale)

By drawing on Fig. 8.1, locate and mark the image I of O. [4]

(iii) Determine the distance of I from the lens and calculate the magnification of O produced
by the lens.

distance = ...............................................................

magnification = ...............................................................
[3]

(c) Describe how a converging lens is used in a camera.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [3]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20 [Turn over

 16

9 Fig. 9.1 shows a permanent magnet lying on a piece of paper.

magnet
paper

Fig. 9.1

(a) Underline the material in the list from which it is possible to make a strong, permanent magnet.

aluminium copper glass iron mercury plastic steel

[1]

(b) Describe an experiment to plot the pattern and the direction of the magnetic field surrounding
the magnet. You may draw on Fig. 9.1, if you wish.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [4]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

 17

(c) Fig. 9.2 shows the N-pole of a magnet placed in front of the S-pole of a second magnet.

S-pole

N-pole

– +
J K

Fig. 9.2

A section of a horizontal, metal wire JK lies in the magnetic field between the two magnetic
poles. End K of the metal wire is connected to the positive terminal of a battery and end J is
connected to the negative terminal.

(i) Explain in terms of electrons, why there is a current in the wire and state the direction of
the conventional current.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

(ii) The part of JK that is in the magnetic field experiences a force F.

State the direction of F and describe how this direction is deduced.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20 [Turn over

 18

(iii) The equipment in Fig. 9.2 is used in a similar experiment.

The part of JK that lies between the poles of the magnets, now passes through a long
iron tube that is fixed in position.

The tube is shown in Fig. 9.3.

iron tube

– +
J K

Fig. 9.3

JK is connected to the battery in the same way as before.

State what happens to force F on the wire.

Explain your answer.

...........................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

 19

(d) The iron tube and the wire JK are removed.

A square, vertical coil is placed between the poles so that the plane of the coil lies in the
magnetic field as shown in Fig. 9.4.

S-pole

N-pole

square coil

Fig. 9.4

Explain why the coil tries to rotate when there is a current in the coil.

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................. [2]

[Total: 15]

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

 20

BLANK PAGE

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.

To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.

Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2020 5054/22/O/N/20

Centre Number Candidate Number Candidate Name

NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICAL SCIENCE ORDINARY LEVEL 4323/2

PAPER 2 2 hours
Marks 100 2019

Additional Materials: Non-programmable calculator

Ruler

INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

V E L
E
• Candidates answer on the Question Paper in the spaces provided.

L
• Write your Centre Number, Candidate Number and Name in the spaces For Examiner’s Use
provided on top of this page.

Y
• Write in dark blue or black pen. 1
2

R
• You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
• Do not use correction fluid. 3

A
• Do not write in the margin For Examiner’s Use. 4

IN
5
• Answer all questions.
6

D
7
• The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question
8

R
or part question.
9

O
• You will lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 10
appropriate units.
11
12
• Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall g = 10 m/s2).
• The Periodic Table is printed on page 20. Total
Marker
Checker

This document consists of 20 printed pages.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE

© MoEAC/DNEA 4323/2/19
926195
[Turn over
 2
For
Examiner’s
1 An aeroplane of mass 1.12 × 10 kg accelerating constantly from rest along a
5
Use
runway.

(a) Calculate the weight of the aeroplane.

Weight.........................................N [1]
(b) Name one of the forces acting on the aeroplane apart from the weight.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The aeroplane starts from rest and after 50 s, the aeroplane reaches a
speed of 70 m/s.
Calculate the
(i) acceleration of the aeroplane,

Acceleration........................... m/s2 [2]

(ii) horizontal resultant force on the aeroplane.

Resultant force...........................N [2]

(d) State one form of energy that increases as the aeroplane gains height,
while travelling at constant speed.

................................................................................................................... [1]
[7]

4323/2/19
926195
 3
For
2 Sodium, Na, and chlorine, Cl, react to form sodium chloride, NaCl. Examiner’s
Use
Sodium chloride is made up of sodium ion, Na+, and chloride ion, Cl−.
(a) Describe how a sodium ion, Na+, is formed.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the number of electrons in a chloride ion, Cl−.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Hydrogen also reacts with chlorine to form hydrogen chloride, HCl.
(i) Name the type of bond present in hydrogen chloride.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Draw a structure of hydrogen chloride using the Lewis notation.

[2]
(d) Sodium chloride and hydrogen chloride consist of different types of bonds.
(i) Complete the table to show the difference in the solubility of sodium
chloride in water and in organic solvents.
Use the terms soluble and insoluble to indicate your answer.

solubility
water organic solvents
sodium chloride
[1]
(ii) Explain in terms of intermolecular forces, why sodium chloride has a
high melting point and hydrogen chloride has a low melting point.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
[7]

4323/2/19 [Turn over

926195
 4
For
Examiner’s
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an electric iron which contains a thermostat. The thermostat Use
uses a bimetallic strip.

X
fuse

Z
bimetallic strip

contacts

base plate heating element

Fig. 3.1
(a) When current is passed through the heating element, it gets very hot.
(i) Name the main method of heat transfer from the heating element to
the base plate.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) With the help of a diagram, describe the structure of a bimetallic strip.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(iii) Explain how the bimetallic strip operates to control the temperature
of the electric iron.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

4323/2/19
926195
 5
For
Examiner’s
(b) The electric iron is connected to a 240 V supply and dispates 1400 W of power. Use

Calculate the current flowing in the iron.

Current........................................ A [2]
(c) Use Fig. 3.1 to identify the wiring X, Y, Z of the electric plug and their
corresponding colours.

X
Z
Y
fuse

X ......................................................colour ...............................................

Y ......................................................colour ...............................................

Z .......................................................colour ............................................... [3]

(d) State one safety device in the use of the electric iron in Fig. 3.1.

................................................................................................................... [1]
[11]

4323/2/19 [Turn over

926195
 6
For
Examiner’s
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a setup of an experiment to investigate the effect of the size of Use
marble chips on the rate of reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid.
dilute
balance scale hydrochloric acid
20 g of
marble chips

On/Off
0.00 g
Re- Zero

Fig. 4.1
The loss of mass was measured every one minute, and the results are
sketched on a graph as shown in Fig. 4.2.

Loss of
mass / g

t / min
Fig. 4.2
(a) The reaction of marble chips and dilute hydrochloric acid is exothermic.
Describe the meaning of exothermic.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The experiment was repeated with the same volume and same concentration
of dilute hydrochloric acid and 20 g of powdered marble chips.
(i) On Fig. 4.2, sketch a line to show the results of this second experiment. [2]
(ii) Explain your answer in (b)(i) in terms of the collision theory.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

4323/2/19
926195
 7
For
Examiner’s
(c) Carbon dioxide gas is released in this reaction. Use

Describe the chemical test for CO2.

Test............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

Result.........................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The equation for this reaction is given below.
CaCO3 (s) + 2HCl (aq) → CaCl2 (aq) + H2O (l) + CO2 (g)

Calculate the
(i) number of moles in 20 g of the marble chips (CaCO3). [Ca:40, C:12, O:16]

Number of moles.......................... [2]

(ii) mass of calcium chloride, CaCl2 that was produced. [Ca:40, Cl:35.5]

Mass = ....................................... g [2]

[11]

4323/2/19 [Turn over

926195
 8
For
Examiner’s
5 Ted drops a stone in the water and observes wavefronts spread out from the Use
stone as shown in Fig. 5.1.

Fig. 5.1
(a) Define the term wavefront.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Ted observes two water waves pass a point in one second.
Calculate the
(i) period of the waves,

Period =........................................ [1]

(ii) wavelength of the waves if they were travelling at 0.1 m/s.

Wavelength =............................. m [2]

4323/2/19
926195
 9
For
Examiner’s
(c) Ted used the ripple tank to demonstrate wave properties of water. Use
Fig. 5.2 shows one of these properties.

boundary
Fig. 5.2
(i) Name the property demonstrated in Fig. 5.2.
............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) As the waves in Fig. 5.2 cross the boundary, the depth of the water
changes. Indicate on Fig. 5.2, which side of the boundary is shallow
and which side is deep. [1]
(iii) When the wave crosses the boundary, its velocity changes.
State one other property of the wave that changes.
............................................................................................................ [1]
(d) Fig. 5.3 shows the results of another experiment in the ripple tank.
gap

boundary

Fig. 5.3
(i) Name the property demonstrated in Fig. 5.3.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The experiment is done with a gap of similar size to the wavelength of
the waves and repeated with a much wider gap.
Give the property of the patterns formed for each gap.

Narrow gap.........................................................................................

............................................................................................................

Wide gap.............................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

[10]
4323/2/19 [Turn over
926195
 10
For
Examiner’s
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the stages used in the laboratory preparation of the salt, Use
copper (II) sulfate, from copper (II) oxide and dilute sulfuric acid.

rod
copper (II)
oxide

warm
sulfuric acid

stage 1 stage 2

evaporation
aqueous cooling
copper (II)
sulfate copper (II)
heat
sulfate crystals

stage 3 stage 4

Fig. 6.1
(a) Define acid, in terms of proton transfer.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Sulfuric acid is a strong acid.
State the pH of a strong acid.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Copper and oxygen reacts to form copper (II) oxide, CuO.
Suggest what type of oxide this is.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Copper (II) sulfate is a soluble salt.
(i) State the name of the method used for preparing soluble salts from an
aqueous solution.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain the reason for filtering the copper (II) sulfate solution in stage 2.

............................................................................................................ [1]

4323/2/19
926195
 11
For
Examiner’s
(iii) Describe how you would obtain pure crystals of copper (II) sulfate from Use
its solution in stage 4.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
[7]

4323/2/19 [Turn over

926195
 12
For
Examiner’s
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a simple form of an alternating current (a.c.) generator. Use

magnet coil magnet

N S

P slip rings

output terminal

Fig. 7.1
(a) Define the term electromotive force (e.m.f.).

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Identify the part labelled P.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Sketch the voltage output graph for the induced e.m.f. showing two
revolutions of the coil.
V

[2]
(d) State one way to increase the induced e.m.f.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Draw the circuit that could be connected to the output terminal to produce
a direct current.

[1]
4323/2/19
926195
 13
For
Examiner’s
(f) Transformers are essential in the transmission of electricity. Use
(i) An alternating current in the primary coil of a transformer causes an
e.m.f. in the secondary coil.
Name the process which causes this.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) A transformer with an input voltage of 18 V has 4 800 turns in the
secondary coil and an output voltage of 240 V.
Calculate the number of turns in the primary coil. Write down the formula
that you use.

Number of turns........................... [3]

[10]

4323/2/19 [Turn over

926195
 14
For
Examiner’s
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a blast furnace, where iron is extracted from its ore. Use
iron ore
coke, substance C

waste gases

hot air
slag molten iron

Fig. 8.1
The reaction equation is shown below.
Fe2O3 + 3CO → 2Fe + 3CO2
(a) Name substance C.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Carbon monoxide is formed from coke in two stages.
In stage 1, coke reacts (burns) in hot air to produce carbon dioxide.
(i) Describe stage 2 of this reaction.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Suggest the function of carbon monoxide in the extraction of iron from
iron (III) oxide.

............................................................................................................ [1]

4323/2/19
926195
 15
For
Examiner’s
(c) In another reaction, an iron nail is placed in blue copper (II) sulfate solution Use
as shown in Fig. 8.2.

iron nail

blue copper (II)

sulfate
Fig. 8.2
(i) Describe the observation that is made.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain why the iron nail reacts with copper (II) sulfate.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Give evidence from the information given in Fig. 8.2 that suggests that
copper is a transition metal.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(d) Iron rusts.
Describe one method of rust prevention.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]
[7]

4323/2/19 [Turn over

926195
 16
For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a flow chart of the production of limewater from limestone. Use
Limestone is a form of calcium carbonate.

heat add add

limestone lime slaked lime limewater
water more
water
Fig. 9.1
(a) Give the chemical name of slaked lime.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Complete the chemical equation to show the production of lime from
limestone.
CaCO3(s) → ......................... + ......................... [2]
(c) Give one use of limestone.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Calcium compounds such as limestone in rocks cause hardness in water.
(i) State one compound that causes permanent hardness in water.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Name one method of softening permanent hard water.

............................................................................................................ [1]
[6]

4323/2/19
926195
 17
For
Examiner’s
10 Fig.10.1 shows reactions of an unsaturated hydrocarbon A, which is the first in Use
the homologous series of alkenes.
unsaturated
hydrocarbon
A

su n
es atio

re
re
re

ac
d-
is
er

ts
br
m

ow

w
pr
ly

ith uid
n
po
gh

liq
hi

H H

B
+

−
substance steam Br − C − C − Br
C acid conditions H H

−
+ weak acid D
ethanol ethyl
ethanoate

Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe the meaning of the phrase homologous series.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Deduce substances A, B, C and D.

A................................................................................................................

B................................................................................................................

C................................................................................................................

D................................................................................................................ [4]
(c) Draw the structure of ethanol.

[2]
(d) Give one use of ethanol.

................................................................................................................... [1]
[8]

4323/2/19 [Turn over

926195
 18
For
Examiner’s
11 The types of radiation from a radioactive source are investigated by a scientist. Use
(a) It was observed that the detector shows a count rate of 15 counts per minute
even though there is no source present.
Explain why there is a count under these conditions.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The scientist then sets up the detector near to the radioactive source and
observes the readings on the detector when different absorbers are placed
between the source and the detector.
The readings are shown in Table 11.1.

Table 11.1

absorber reading / counts per minute

none 3 329
sheet of paper 1 305
2 mm of aluminium 1 309
4 cm of lead 31
(i) There are 3 types of radiation, alpha, beta and gamma.
Use Table 11.1 to determine which of these radiations were present in
the radioactive source.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State the number of protons and neutrons found in an alpha
particle.
............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(iii) Gamma rays pass between two electrically charged plates.
Describe what is observed.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(c) Describe one safety precaution which must be taken when handling
the radioactive source.
...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]
[7]

4323/2/19
926195
 19
For
Examiner’s
12 Table 12.1 shows sources of five pollutants, over a specified period of time. Use

Table 12.1

pollutant source of pollution and mass of pollution produced / tonnes

cars power stations burning rubbish other sources
sulfur dioxide 5 20 4 8
carbon monoxide 52 3 6 2
nitrogen dioxide 6 8 0.5 1
smoke 3 10 2 6
lead compounds 4 0 0 0
(a) Use Table 12.1 to determine which source produced the greatest mass of
pollutants.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Another pollutant, which is not listed in Table 12.1, is produced mostly by
burning fossil fuels. This pollutant causes global warming.
(i) Name this pollutant.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one effect of global warming.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(c) Carbon monoxide pollution is a major problem in cities.
Describe how carbon monoxide is formed.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) From the information in Table 12.1, the major source of sulfur dioxide is
the power station.
(i) Suggest another industry in Namibia that could contribute to sulfur
dioxide being formed.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Sulfur dioxide causes acid rain.
Name one other pollutant in the table that causes acid rain.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(e) According to Table 12.1, only cars emit lead compounds.
(i) Explain how the emission of lead compounds can be minimised in a car.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The catalytic converter in the car exhaust converts harmful gases into
less harmless ones.
Name two gases that are released as products in the converter.

1 .........................................................................................................

2 ......................................................................................................... [2]
[9]

4323/2/19
926195
 DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

Group

I II III IV V VI VII 0

1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
23 24 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
20

926195
Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon

4323/2/18
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89 †
*58 - 71 Lanthanoid series 140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
†90 - 103 Actinoid series Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Key a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
b = proton (atomic) number Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
Centre Number Candidate Number Candidate Name

NAMIBIA SENIOR SECONDARY CERTIFICATE

PHYSICAL SCIENCE ORDINARY LEVEL 4323/2

PAPER 2 2 hours
Marks 100 2018

Additional Materials: Non-programmable calculator

Ruler

INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO CANDIDATES

V E L
L E
• Candidates answer on the Question Paper in the spaces provided.
• Write your Centre Number, Candidate Number and Name in the spaces

Y
provided on top of this page. For Examiner’s Use
• Write in dark blue or black pen.

R
• You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working. 1

A
• Do not use correction fluid. 2
• Do not write in the margin For Examiner’s Use. 3

I N
4
• Answer all questions.
5

D
6
• The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question

R
or part question. 7

O
8
• You will lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 9
appropriate units.
10
11
• Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e acceleration of free fall g = 10 m/s2).
• The Periodic Table is printed on page 17. Total
Marker
Checker

This document consists of 17 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

Republic of Namibia
MINISTRY OF EDUCATION, ARTS AND CULTURE

© MoEAC/DNEA 4323/2/18 [Turn over

826195
 2
For
Examiner’s
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the structures of atoms of aluminium and element X. Element X Use
is unreactive.
13p 18p
x 14n xx 22n
xx xx
xx

xx

xx

xx
xx

xx
x

x
xx x xx
xx
aluminium element X
Fig. 1.1
(a)  (i) Identify element X.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State the period number of aluminium and element X.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) By referring to the structure, explain why element X is unreactive.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Aluminium reacts with chlorine to form aluminium chloride.
(i) Write a balanced chemical equation for this reaction.

............................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Describe how the chloride ion is formed from chlorine atom.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(c) Describe a test for aluminium ions.

Test............................................................................................................

Result.........................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [3]
[9]

4323/2/18
826195
 3
For
Examiner’s
2 Two students have flu symptoms and take medicine to relieve the symptoms. Use
Student A swallows a pill with water and student B uses an effervescent tablet
that is to be dissolved in water. Each medicine has three active ingredients. The
table in Fig. 2.1 shows the content of these ingredients in the two medicines.

active ingredients mass of active mass of active

ingredients in the pill/mg ingredients in the
effervescent tablet/mg
asprin/mg 226.8 453.6
paracetamol/mg 162.0 324.0
caffeine/mg 32.4 64.8

Fig. 2.1

(a) State the number of pills student A should take to have the same effect
as one effervescent tablet.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Student B dissolves the tablet in water and observed that the glass feels
cold to touch.
State the type of reaction that took place.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) In another occasion, student B dissolved the tablet in warm water.
With reference to collision theory, state and explain the effect this has on
the time it takes the tablet to dissolve.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [3]
[5]

4323/2/18 [Turn over

826195
 4
For
Examiner’s
3 Excess sodium carbonate reacts with aqueous nitric acid to form sodium Use
nitrate, water and carbon dioxide. The equation of the reaction is shown.
Na2CO3 + 2HNO3 2NaNO3 + H2O + CO2
(a) State why excess sodium carbonate is used in the experiment.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Sodium nitrate salt produced in the reaction is in aqueous solution.
(i) Give the name of the anion of the sodium nitrate salt.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Describe how dry crystals of sodium nitrate can be obtained from
the mixture.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [3]
(c) In the reaction, a volume of 6 000 cm3 of carbon dioxide gas was produced.

(i) Convert 6 000 cm3 to dm3 .................................................................. [1]

(ii) Calculate the number of moles in 6 000 cm3 of carbon dioxide gas
at room temperature and pressure.

No. mol ........................................ [2]

(iii) Calculate the number of moles of nitric acid reacted in the reaction.

No. mol ........................................ [2]

(iv) Calculate the mass of sodium carbonate reacted in the reaction.

Mass .......................................... g [2]

[12]

4323/2/18
826195
 5
For
Examiner’s
4 Zinc, iron and lead are metals found in ores. They can be extracted using Use
different methods and have different uses.
(a) State the name of an ore of lead.

................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State, with a reason, the method of extraction of iron from its ore.

Method.......................................................................................................

Reason......................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Zinc is used to galvanise iron to prevent rusting.
(i) Describe how galvanising prevents iron from rusting.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State two other methods of rust prevention.

1..........................................................................................................

2.......................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Zinc is also used in making alloys.
Explain how alloying affects the electrical conductivity of zinc.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

[9]

4323/2/18 [Turn over

826195
 6
For
Examiner’s
5 Fig. 5.1 shows functional groups of different homologous series. Use
(a) Use Fig. 5.1 to match the molecules on the left with their functional groups
on the right.
The first one has been done for you.

ethene O
C
O

propanoic acid O H

ethylethanoate C C

O
C
methanol O H
Fig. 5.1
[3]
(b) Propane is found in the same homologous series as ethane.
Draw the molecular structure of the propane molecule.

[2]
(c) Ethane undergoes a chemical reaction to form a polymer.
(i) State the name given to this reaction.
............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Describe how polymers are formed.
............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

[8]

4323/2/18
826195
 7
For
Examiner’s
6 The decomposition of limestone produces lime and carbon dioxide. Lime is Use
used in controlling acidity in the soil.
(a) Write the word equation for the decomposition of limestone.

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe two other ways carbon dioxide can be produced.

1.................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

2.................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Explain the importance of using lime in controlling soil acidity.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The fertility of the soil can be improved by adding fertilisers.
(i) State the advantage of fertilisers containing potassium.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain the danger of overuse of fertilisers to aquatic life.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [3]
[10]

4323/2/18 [Turn over

826195
 8
For
Examiner’s
7 The table in Fig. 7.1 shows how the speed of a drone changes with time as it Use
flies in a straight line between two points.

m
speed/ 0 20 40 60 80 80 80 100 120 90 60
s
time/
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
seconds
Fig. 7.1
(a) Use the table in Fig. 7.1 to describe the motion of the drone from
(i) 0 ‒ 8 seconds of the journey.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) 8 ‒ 12 seconds of the journey.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Calculate the acceleration of the drone in the last 4 seconds.
Show your working.

Acceleration ........................ m/s2 [3]

(c) 300 KJ of chemical energy is transferred into other forms of energy as

the drone travels the first 8 s.
(i) State one form of energy into which the chemical energy is transferred.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Convert 300 kilojoules into joules.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Calculate the power developed by the drone.
Show your working.

Power........................................ W [2]

4323/2/18
826195
 9
For
Examiner’s
(d) The total pressure exerted by all four tyres on a car is 2.0×105 Pa. The Use
area of each of the four tyres in contact with the road is 100 cm2.
Calculate
(i) the total contact area of the tyres.

Area ....................................... cm2 [1]

(ii) the force exerted by the four tyres of the car on the ground.

Force .........................................N [2]

[12]

4323/2/18 [Turn over

826195
 10
For
Examiner’s
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a solar hot water system. Use
blackened layer
of solar panel
hot water out

glass storage
cover tank
coil of water pipes

pump cold water in

network of
water pipes
Fig. 8.1
(a) Name the main method by which heat is transferred from
(i) the sun to the solar panel.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the water in the coil to the storage tank.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(b) With reference to density, explain why hot water leaves the storage tank
from the top.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Use the phrases in the list to complete the sentences.
white shiny white matt black silver
The surface which is the

(i) best absorber of radiation is............................................................... . [1]

(ii) worst emitter of radiation is................................................................ . [1]

(iii) best reflector of radiation is................................................................ . [1]

[7]

4323/2/18
826195
 11
For
Examiner’s
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a ray of light from the sun striking a triangular prism. Use

screen

Fig. 9.1
(a)  (i) On Fig. 9.1 draw a normal line where the light ray strikes the prism. [1]
(ii) Complete the diagram in Fig. 9.1 to show the path of light as it
enters and leaves the triangular prism. [1]
(b) When light rays from the triangular prism hits the screen, a continuous
light spectrum is formed.
Explain why this spectrum is formed.

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]

4323/2/18 [Turn over

826195
 12
For
Examiner’s
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows an object placed 5.0 cm from the centre C, of a convex lens Use
which has focal length of 3.0 cm as shown in Fig. 9.2.

C
object F1 F2

lens

Fig. 9.2
On Fig. 9.2 draw
(i) two rays from the top of the object to locate the position of the image
formed. [2]
(ii) the image and label it I. [1]
(d) The object is moved and placed 2.0 cm from the centre C, of the lens.
State one property of the new image formed.

................................................................................................................... [1]
[8]

4323/2/18
826195
 13
For
Examiner’s
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows an insulated coiled wire (solenoid) connected to a cell. Use

Fig. 10.1
A north pole of a permanent bar magnet is brought closer to the left hand
side of the solenoid.
State and explain the observation made.

Observation...............................................................................................

Explanation................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................... [2]

4323/2/18 [Turn over

826195
 14
For
Examiner’s
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a model of an a.c generator. Use

axle rotation
direction

x y
N S

w z
R Q

Fig. 10.2
The coil of wire labelled w x y z is rotated in the direction shown and
e.m.f. is induced in the coil.
(i) On Fig. 10.2 draw arrows to indicate the direction of induced e.m.f. on
side w-x and side y-z. [1]
(ii) Explain why the e.m.f. is induced in the coil as the coil rotates between
the poles of the magnet.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) Identify the components labelled R and Q in Fig. 10.2.

R ........................................................................................................

Q......................................................................................................... [2]

4323/2/18
826195
 15
For
Examiner’s
(c) Fig. 10.3 shows a simple transformer. Use

iron core

24 V
240 V

primary coil secondary coil

(3 000 turns)

Fig. 10.3
(i) State the purpose of an iron core in a transformer.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.

Number of turns ........................... [2]

(iii) Calculate the current output of the secondary coil when there is a current
of 0.25 A in the primary coil.

Current ....................................... A [2]

[11]

4323/2/18 [Turn over

826195
 16
For
Examiner’s
11 The list shows the nuclide notation of three radioactive atoms. Use
238 222 239
J L M
92 90 92

(a) Identify two nuclides which are isotopes of the same element.

1.................................................................................................................

2................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Radioactive atom L is thorium.
(i) State the number of protons in a nucleus of thorium.

............................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Thorium decays by emitting beta particles.
Complete the word equation when thorium decays by emitting
two beta particles.
Thorium ................................ + two beta particles [1]
(c) A Grade 12 student investigates the radioactivity of material L.
(i) Define the term half-life.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]

The student placed a sample of material L a few centimeters from

the GM-tube.
The table in Fig. 11.1 shows the results obtained every hour for 5 hours.
The background radiation of 74 Bq was detected.

Time/hour 0 1 2 3 4 5
Activity/Bq 2110 1690 1356 1092 882 715
Correct activities/Bq

Fig. 11.1
(ii) Complete the table to show the corrected activities of material L
after each hour interval. [2]
(iii) Determine the half-life of material L.

............................................................................................................

............................................................................................................ [2]
[9]

4323/2/18
826195
 DATA SHEET
The Periodic Table of the Elements

Group

I II III IV V VI VII 0

1 4
H He
Hydrogen Helium
1 2
7 9 11 12 14 16 19 20
Li Be B C N O F Ne
Lithium Beryllium Boron Carbon Nitrogen Oxygen Fluorine Neon
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
23 24 27 28 31 32 35,5 40
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
Sodium Magnesium Aluminium Silicon Phosphorus Sulfur Chlorine Argon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
39 40 45 48 51 52 55 56 59 59 64 65 70 73 75 79 80 84
K Ca Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr
Potassium Calcium Scandium Titanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Iron Cobalt Nickel Copper Zinc Gallium Germanium Arsenic Selenium Bromine Krypton
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
Rb Sr Y Zr Nb Mo Tc Ru Rh Pd Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe
17

Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium Niobium Molybdenum Technetium Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Silver Cadmium Indium Tin Antimony Tellurium Iodine Xenon
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
133 137 139 178 181 184 186 190 192 195 197 201 204 207 209

826195
Cs Ba La Hf Ta W Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At Rn

4323/2/18
Caesium Barium Lanthanum Hafnium Tantalum Tungsten Rhenium Osmium Iridium Platinum Gold Mercury Thallium Lead Bismuth Polonium Astatine Radon
55 56 57 * 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
226 227
Fr Ra Ac
Francium Radium Actinium
87 88 89 †
*58 - 71 Lanthanoid series 140 141 144 150 152 157 159 162 165 167 169 173 175
†90 - 103 Actinoid series Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
Cerium Praseodymium Neodymium Promethium Samarium Europium Gadolinium Terbium Dysprosium Holmium Erbium Thulium Ytterbium Lutetium
58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
Key a a = relative atomic mass 232 238
X X = atomic symbol Th Pa U Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
b = proton (atomic) number Thorium Protactinium Uranium Neptunium Plutonium Americium Curium Berkelium Californium Einsteinium Fermium Mendelevium Nobelium Lawrencium
b 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103

The volume of one mole of any gas is 24 dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
 18

BLANK PAGE

4323/2/18
826195
 19

BLANK PAGE

4323/2/18
826195
 20

BLANK PAGE

4323/2/18
826195